R&S ZNL User Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. R&S Manuals
  4. Measuring Instruments
  5. ZNL
  6. User manual

R&S ZNL User Manual

Vector network analyzers
Hide thumbs
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual
®
R&S
ZNL/ZNLE
Vector Network Analyzers
User Manual
(;ÜÉÐ2)
1178596602
Version 19

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading

Related Manuals for R&S ZNL

Summary of Contents for R&S ZNL

  • Page 1 ® R&S ZNL/ZNLE Vector Network Analyzers User Manual (;ÜÉÐ2) 1178596602 Version 19...
  • Page 2 All other trademarks are the properties of their respective owners. ® 1178.5966.02 | Version 19 | R&S ZNL/ZNLE Throughout this manual, products from Rohde & Schwarz are indicated without the ® symbol, e.g. R&S ® ZNL is indicated as R&S ZNL.

  • Page 3: Table Of Contents

    Contents R&S ZNL/ZNLE Contents 1 Safety and regulatory information............13 Safety instructions......................13 Labels on R&S ZNL/ZNLE..................16 Warning messages in the documentation..............17 Korea certification class A..................17 2 Documentation overview..............18 Getting started manual....................18 User manuals and help....................18 Service manual......................18 Instrument security procedures................
  • Page 4 ® Contents R&S ZNL/ZNLE 4.1.12 Checking the supplied options..................36 4.1.13 Considerations for test setup..................37 Instrument tour......................38 4.2.1 Front panel view......................38 4.2.2 Rear panel view......................45 Trying out the instrument...................51 4.3.1 Performing measurements....................51 4.3.2 Zooming into the display....................58 4.3.3...
  • Page 5 ® Contents R&S ZNL/ZNLE 6.2.3 How to save and load instrument settings..............103 Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings....105 6.3.1 Print and screenshot settings..................105 6.3.2 How to store or print screenshots of the display............115 7 General instrument setup..............118 Reference frequency....................118...
  • Page 6 How to log on to the network..................171 8.5.4 How to share directories (only with microsoft networks)..........173 8.5.5 How to control the R&S ZNL/ZNLE via the web browser interface......174 8.5.6 How to deactivate the web browser interface............. 175 8.5.7 How to set up remote desktop..................
  • Page 7 ® Contents R&S ZNL/ZNLE 9.3.4 Admittance parameters....................222 9.3.5 Wave quantities and ratios..................223 9.3.6 Unbalance-balance conversion...................225 9.3.7 Stability factors......................228 9.3.8 Group delay.........................229 Operations on traces....................230 9.4.1 Limit check........................230 9.4.2 Trace files........................237 9.4.3 Memory-mapped trace data transfer................246 Calibration......................... 247 9.5.1...
  • Page 8 ® Contents R&S ZNL/ZNLE 9.7.13 Internal Li-ion batteries....................306 9.7.14 Power sensor measurements (R&S ZNL only)............306 10 VNA GUI reference................309 10.1 Function Keys and softtools..................309 10.2 Stimulus softtool.......................310 10.2.1 Stimulus tab.........................311 10.2.2 Power tab........................312 10.2.3 Time Domain tab......................314 10.3...
  • Page 9 ® Contents R&S ZNL/ZNLE 10.7 Meas softtool......................394 10.7.1 S-Params tab......................395 10.7.2 Ratios tab........................402 10.7.3 Wave tab........................405 10.7.4 Z←Sij tab........................407 10.7.5 Y←Sij tab........................409 10.7.6 Y-Z-Params tab......................411 10.7.7 Stability tab........................413 10.7.8 Power Sensor tab......................414 10.8 Format softtool......................415...
  • Page 10 Commands for remote instrument operation...............567 11.3.2 Selecting the operating mode and application............568 11.3.3 Managing settings and results..................575 11.3.4 Configuring the R&S ZNL/ZNLE................. 602 11.4 VNA remote control basics..................624 11.4.1 Block data format......................624 11.4.2 Basic remote control concepts..................624 11.4.3...
  • Page 11 ® Contents R&S ZNL/ZNLE 11.6 VNA programming examples................. 1050 11.6.1 Basic tasks........................ 1050 11.6.2 Condensed programming examples................. 1059 11.7 List of commands....................1080 12 Troubleshooting................1100 12.1 Error messages and troubleshooting..............1100 12.1.1 Errors during firmware operation................1100 12.1.2 Errors during firmware installation/update..............1102 12.2...
  • Page 12 ® Contents R&S ZNL/ZNLE User Manual 1178.5966.02 ─ 19...

  • Page 13: Safety And Regulatory Information

    ® Safety and regulatory information R&S ZNL/ZNLE Safety instructions 1 Safety and regulatory information The product documentation helps you use the product safely and efficiently. Follow the instructions provided here and in the following chapters. Intended use The product is intended for the development, production and verification of electronic components and devices in industrial, administrative, and laboratory environments.
  • Page 14 ® Safety and regulatory information R&S ZNL/ZNLE Safety instructions Choosing the operating site Only use the product indoors. The product casing is not waterproof. Water that enters can electrically connect the casing with live parts, which can lead to electric shock, serious personal injury or death if you touch the casing.
  • Page 15 ® Safety and regulatory information R&S ZNL/ZNLE Safety instructions ● If the product needs an external power supply, use the power supply that is deliv- ered with the product or that is recommended in the product documentation or a power supply that conforms to the country-specific regulations.

  • Page 16: Labels On R&S Znl/Znle

    Chapter 4.2.2.14, "Device ID", on page 51 Table 1-1: Labels regarding R&S ZNL/ZNLE and environment safety Labeling in line with EN 50419 for disposal of electrical and electronic equipment after the prod- uct has come to the end of its service life.

  • Page 17: Warning Messages In The Documentation

    ® Safety and regulatory information R&S ZNL/ZNLE Korea certification class A 1.3 Warning messages in the documentation A warning message points out a risk or danger that you need to be aware of. The sig- nal word indicates the severity of the safety hazard and how likely it will occur if you do not follow the safety precautions.

  • Page 18: Documentation Overview

    2.1 Getting started manual Introduces the R&S ZNL/ZNLE and describes how to set up and start working with the product. Includes basic operations, typical measurement examples, and general infor- mation, e.g. safety instructions, etc. A printed version is delivered with the instrument. A PDF version is available for down- load on the Internet.

  • Page 19: Instrument Security Procedures

    ZNLE service manual 2.4 Instrument security procedures Deals with security issues when working with the R&S ZNL/ZNLE in secure areas. It is available for download on the internet. 2.5 Printed safety instructions Provides safety information in many languages. The printed document is delivered with the product.

  • Page 20: Application Notes, Application Cards, White Papers, Etc

    ® Documentation overview R&S ZNL/ZNLE Calibration certificate 2.8 Application notes, application cards, white papers, etc. These documents deal with special applications or background information on particu- lar topics. www.rohde-schwarz.com/application/ZNL www.rohde-schwarz.com/application/ ZNLE. 2.9 Calibration certificate The document is available on https://gloris.rohde-schwarz.com/calcert. You need the device ID of your instrument, which you can find on a label on the rear panel.

  • Page 21: What's New In Firmware Version 1.70

    ZNL/ZNLE Firmware version 1.70 3 What's new in firmware version 1.70 This section lists the changes introduced in the current version of the R&S ZNL/ZNLE firmware. Software version ► To check your R&S ZNL/ZNLE "Instrument Firmware" and "VNA Server" version, select [SETUP] >...
  • Page 22 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SELect <TraceName> restarted the sweep Spectrum analysis changes The spectrum analysis function of the R&S ZNL (with hardware option B1) and its addi- tional software options are based on firmware 2.00 of the Rohde & Schwarz spectrum analyzer R&S FPL1000.

  • Page 23: Getting Started

    "Lifting and carrying the product" on page 13. 4.1.2 Unpacking and checking 1. Unpack the R&S ZNL/ZNLE carefully. 2. Retain the original packing material. Use it when transporting or shipping the R&S ZNL/ZNLE later. 3. Using the delivery notes, check the equipment for completeness.

  • Page 24: Setting Up The R&S Znl/Znle

    4.1.4 Setting up the R&S ZNL/ZNLE The R&S ZNL/ZNLE is designed for use either on a bench top or in a rack, or as a portable instrument (with optional battery operation) in a transport bag in the field.
  • Page 25 2. Lift the R&S ZNL/ZNLE to shelf height. 3. Grab the handles and push the R&S ZNL/ZNLE onto the shelf until the rack brack- ets fit closely to the rack. 4. Tighten all screws in the rack brackets with a tightening torque of 1.2 Nm to secure the R&S ZNL/ZNLE in the rack.

  • Page 26: Connecting To Power

    Getting Started R&S ZNL/ZNLE Preparing for use help of the optional vest holster, you can carry the R&S ZNL in its bag and keep your hands free. Together with the optional battery pack (see Chapter 4.1.5.3, "Optional bat- tery pack (R&S FPL1-B31)",...
  • Page 27 4.1.5.3 Optional battery pack (R&S FPL1-B31) As an alternative to the fixed AC or DC power supply, the R&S ZNL also allows for bat- tery operation. The "Battery Pack" option R&S FPL1-B31 comprises two Li-ion batter- User Manual 1178.5966.02 ─ 19...
  • Page 28 For batteries from third parties, follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer. For batteries manufactured by Rohde & Schwarz, observe the following: ● If inserted in the R&S ZNL, batteries are charged via the common AC or DC power supply. ●...

  • Page 29: Switching On Or Off

    R&S FSV-B34. Even during battery operation, you can exchange the internal batteries while the R&S ZNL is running, as long as one battery remains in the instrument. How- ever, it is not recommended to operate the R&S ZNL with only one battery for a longer period.

  • Page 30: Connecting To Lan

    46. The LED of the standby key is switched off. 2. Disconnect the R&S ZNL/ZNLE from the power source. 4.1.7 Connecting to LAN You can connect the instrument to a LAN for remote operation via a PC.

  • Page 31: Connecting A Keyboard

    Getting Started R&S ZNL/ZNLE Preparing for use Connect the R&S ZNL/ZNLE to the LAN via the LAN interface on the rear panel of the instrument. Windows automatically detects the network connection and activates the required drivers. By default, the R&S ZNL/ZNLE is configured to use DHCP and no static IP address is configured.
  • Page 32 Preparing for use Screen resolution and format The touchscreen of the R&S ZNL/ZNLE is calibrated for a 16:10 format. If you connect a monitor or projector using a different format (e.g. 4:3), the calibration is not correct and the screen does not react to your touch actions properly.

  • Page 33: Windows Operating System

    To fix the mapping between touchscreen and display, connect an external monitor to the R&S ZNL/ZNLE and proceed as follows: 1. Select [Setup] > "Display" > "Configure Monitor" > "Display Switch" to bring up the Windows 10 "PROJECT" notification window.
  • Page 34 After the R&S ZNL/ZNLE is started, the operating system boots and the instrument firmware is started automati- cally.

  • Page 35: Logging On

    4.1.11 Logging on Windows requires that users identify themselves by entering a user name and pass- word in a login window. By default, the R&S ZNL/ZNLE provides two user accounts: ● "Instrument" : a standard user account with limited access ●...

  • Page 36: Checking The Supplied Options

    If you change the password that is used during auto-login, this function no longer works. Adapt the settings for the auto-login function first. 1. Select the "Windows" icon in the toolbar to access the operating system of the R&S ZNL/ZNLE (see also "To access the "Start" menu" on page 35).

  • Page 37: Considerations For Test Setup

    If you are working in an environment where strong ESD discharges are possible, for additional protection Rohde & Schwarz recommends using broadband limiters R&S ZN‑B13 (stock number 1303.7840.02) at each port of your R&S ZNL/ZNLE3|4|6. Signal input and output levels Information on signal levels is provided in the data sheet and on the instrument, next to the connector.

  • Page 38: Instrument Tour

    ® Getting Started R&S ZNL/ZNLE Instrument tour 4.2 Instrument tour 4.2.1 Front panel view This chapter describes the front panel, including all function keys and connectors. Figure 4-1: Front panel view 1 = Power key 2 = USB (2.0) connectors...
  • Page 39 ® Getting Started R&S ZNL/ZNLE Instrument tour Figure 4-2: Touchscreen elements 1 = Toolbar with standard application functions, e.g. print, save/open file etc. 2 = Tabs for individual channel setups 3 = Softtool panel (a.k.a. softkey bar) 4 = Window title bar with diagram-specific (trace) information...
  • Page 40 System keys System keys set the instrument to a predefined state, change basic settings, and pro- vide print and display functions. A detailed description of the corresponding functions is provided in the R&S ZNL/ZNLE user manual. Table 4-2: System keys...
  • Page 41 Function keys provide access to the most common measurement settings and func- tions. A detailed description of the corresponding functions is provided in the R&S ZNL/ZNLE user manual. The labels indicated in italics (blue font color on the instrument) apply to the optional Spectrum mode only.
  • Page 42 Defines the power of the internal signal Sets the resolution bandwidth and the sources, selects the receiver step attenua- video bandwidth. tors (optional, R&S ZNL only!) and the IF bandwidths, and sets up averaging. [Sweep] Defines the sweep type and other sweep Sets the sweep time and the number of parameters;...
  • Page 43 ® Getting Started R&S ZNL/ZNLE Instrument tour Type of key Description [ESC] Closes all kinds of dialog boxes, if the edit mode is not active. Quits the edit mode, if the edit mode is active. In dialog boxes that contain a "Can- cel"...
  • Page 44 ® Getting Started R&S ZNL/ZNLE Instrument tour Arrow Up/Arrow Down Keys The <arrow up> or <arrow down> keys do the following: ● For numeric entries: increments (Arrow Up) or decrements (Arrow Down) the instrument parameter at a defined step width ●...

  • Page 45: Rear Panel View

    4.2.1.9 RF INPUT 50 Ohm Provides RF input from a connected device under test (DUT) to the R&S ZNL, which is then analyzed in an RF measurement. Connect the DUT to the "RF Input" on the R&S ZNL via a cable equipped with an appropriate connector. Do not overload the input.
  • Page 46 4 = Trigger input connector 5 = "DVI" connector for external display 6 = "LAN" connector 7 = "USB" (3.0) connectors The meanings of the labels on the R&S ZNL/ZNLE are described in Chapter 1.2, "Labels on R&S ZNL/ZNLE", on page 16.
  • Page 47 The Li-Ion battery pack and DC power connector are available as an optional acces- sory (R&S FPL1-B31 and R&S FPL1-B30). With the Li-ion battery pack, the R&S ZNL can be operated independently of an AC or DC power supply. The instrument can house 2 Li-ion batteries which can be charged both via AC or DC power supply.
  • Page 48 The Ref. In connectors are used to provide an external reference signal to the R&S ZNL/ZNLE. The Ref. Out connectors can be used to provide a reference signal from the R&S ZNL/ ZNLE to other devices that are connected to this instrument.
  • Page 49 In particular, if you run a sequence of measurements including both measurement types, switching between both modes can interrupt the signal from the output connector. For details, see the R&S ZNL/ZNLE Spectrum Mode user manual. 4.2.2.8 Aux. Port A 25-pole D-Sub connector used as an input and output for low-voltage TTL control signals.
  • Page 50 Chapter 8, "Network and remote settings", on page 147. 4.2.2.13 You can connect an external monitor or other display device to the R&S ZNL/ZNLE via the DVI (Digital visual interface) connector to provide an enlarged display. For details, see Chapter 4.1.13, "Considerations for test setup",...

  • Page 51: Trying Out The Instrument

    62 ● Trying out spectrum mode..................64 ● Performing sequential measurements..............70 4.3.1 Performing measurements This chapter takes you through a sample session with a R&S ZNL/ZNLE network ana- lyzer and describes basic operation tasks. User Manual 1178.5966.02 ─ 19...
  • Page 52 To prepare a transmission measurement, you have to connect your DUT (which for simplicity we assume to have appropriate connectors) in-between a pair of analyzer test ports. It is recommended that you preset the R&S ZNL/ZNLE to start from a well- defined instrument state.
  • Page 53 DUT. It is defined as the ratio of the transmitted wave at the DUT's output port (port no. 2) to the incident wave at the DUT's input port (port no. The R&S ZNL/ZNLE automatically adjusts its internal source and receiver to the selected measured quantities: For an S measurement, a stimulus signal (termed a is transmitted at the analyzer port no.
  • Page 54 ® Getting Started R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trying out the instrument By default the sweep range is set to the frequency range of the analyzer, which can be unsuitable for your DUT. The following procedure shows you how to configure a smaller sweep range.
  • Page 55 Getting Started R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trying out the instrument Due to the R&S ZNL/ZNLE's calibration wizard, calibration is a straightforward, guided process. 1. Replace the DUT by the Through standard of your calibration kit. Make sure to dis- connect all calibration units.
  • Page 56 Through standard. The similarity of real and expected traces indicates that the Through standard has been properly connected. After the R&S ZNL/ZNLE has completed the calibration sweep and calculated the correction data, the "Apply" button is enabled.
  • Page 57 ® Getting Started R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trying out the instrument corner of the diagram. The marker info field displays the stimulus value (frequency) and response value (magnitude of the transmission coefficient converted to a dB value) at the marker position. 2. Open the [Mkr->] > "Peak" softtool tab and activate "Min" search.

  • Page 58: Zooming Into The Display

    ® Getting Started R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trying out the instrument In principle, a reflection measurement involves the same steps as a transmission mea- surement. Note the following differences: ● The basic test setup for reflection measurements involves a single DUT and ana- lyzer port.

  • Page 59: Saving Settings

    ® Getting Started R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trying out the instrument 1. Tap the "Multiple Zoom" icon in the toolbar. The icon is highlighted to indicate that zoom mode is active. 2. Tap the diagram near the peak and drag your finger to the opposite corner of the zoom area.
  • Page 60 1. Press the [Preset] button to restore the default instrument settings so you can check that the stored user settings are actually restored afterwards. 2. Tap the "Load" icon in the toolbar. 3. In the "Load" dialog box, select the MyMultiViewSetup.dfl file in the default directory C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\ZNL\Save. User Manual 1178.5966.02 ─ 19...

  • Page 61: Printing And Saving Results

    ® Getting Started R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trying out the instrument 4. Tap the "Load" button. All instrument settings are restored and the display should resemble the instrument display right before the settings were stored. 4.3.4 Printing and saving results Finally, after a successful measurement, we will document our results. First we will export the numeric trace data, then we will create a screenshot of the graphical display.

  • Page 62: Activating Additional Channel Setups

    Trying out the instrument 4.3.5 Activating additional channel setups The R&S ZNL/ZNLE features multiple channel setups, i.e. you can define several mea- surement configurations in parallel and then switch between the channel setups auto- matically to perform the measurements sequentially. We will demonstrate this feature...
  • Page 63 ® Getting Started R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trying out the instrument Figure 4-8: Adding a new channel setup 6. Create a new channel setup for I/Q analysis: a) Press the [Mode] key. b) Tap the "IQ Analyzer" button to activate a channel setup for the I/Q Analyzer application.

  • Page 64: Trying Out Spectrum Mode

    ® Getting Started R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trying out the instrument The "IQ Analyzer" channel setup displays the real and imaginary signal parts in separate windows. To display the MultiView tab An overview of all active channel setups is provided in the "MultiView" tab. This tab is always displayed if more than one channel setup is active and cannot be closed.
  • Page 65 50 MHz. 7. Close the dialog box. The calibration signal is now sent to the RF input of the R&S ZNL/ZNLE. By default, a continuous frequency sweep is performed, so that the spectrum of the calibration signal is now displayed in the standard level versus frequency diagram.
  • Page 66 ® Getting Started R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trying out the instrument To optimize the display To optimize the display for the calibration signal, we will adjust the main measurement settings. 1. Set the center frequency to the calibration frequency: a) Tap the "Overview" softkey to display the configuration "Overview".
  • Page 67 4.3.6.2 Displaying a spectrogram In addition to the standard "level versus frequency" spectrum display, the R&S ZNL/ ZNLE also provides a spectrogram display of the measured data. A spectrogram shows how the spectral density of a signal varies over time. The x-axis shows the fre- quency, the y-axis shows the time.
  • Page 68 ® Getting Started R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trying out the instrument You see the spectrogram compared to the standard spectrum display. Since the calibration signal does not change over time, the color of the frequency levels does not change over time, i.e. vertically. The legend at the top of the spectrogram win- dow describes the power levels the colors represent.
  • Page 69 ® Getting Started R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trying out the instrument 6. Now you can move the marker by tapping and dragging it to a different position. The current position is indicated by a dotted blue line. Notice how the position and value change in the marker area of the diagram.

  • Page 70: Performing Sequential Measurements

    ® Getting Started R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trying out the instrument 6. To obtain a more conclusive peak list that does not contain noise peaks, for exam- ple, define a threshold that is higher than the noise floor: a) Press the [MKR] key on the front panel.

  • Page 71: Operating The Instrument

    Using the web browser interface in a LAN network ● Using the Windows Remote Desktop application in a LAN network ● Connecting a PC via the GPIB interface How to configure the remote control interfaces is described in the R&S ZNL/ZNLE user manual. User Manual 1178.5966.02 ─ 19...

  • Page 72: Understanding The Display Information (Vna Mode)

    ® Getting Started R&S ZNL/ZNLE Operating the instrument ● Understanding the display information (VNA mode)..........72 ● Accessing the functionality..................73 ● Entering data......................78 ● Touchscreen gestures..................... 79 ● Getting help......................82 4.4.1 Understanding the display information (VNA mode) The following figure shows a measurement diagram in VNA mode. All different infor- mation areas are labeled.

  • Page 73: Accessing The Functionality

    ® Getting Started R&S ZNL/ZNLE Operating the instrument 1 = Trace name 2 = Measured parameter 3 = Trace format 4 = Scale per division 5 = Reference value Diagram footer For each parameter diagram, a window is displayed with the following information in...
  • Page 74 ® Getting Started R&S ZNL/ZNLE Operating the instrument 4.4.2.1 Toolbar functions Standard functions can be performed via the icons in the toolbar at the top of the screen. You can hide the toolbar display, e.g. when using remote control, to enlarge the display area for the measurement results ("Setup"...
  • Page 75 Displays the diagram in its original size. SmartGrid Activates "SmartGrid" mode to configure the screen layout. For Spectrum mode only, see the R&S ZNL/ZNLE Spectrum Mode user manual. Sequencer Opens the "Sequencer" menu to perform consecutive measurements. Chapter 5.4, "Running a sequence of measurements",...
  • Page 76 ® Getting Started R&S ZNL/ZNLE Operating the instrument Chapter 4.4.5, "Getting help", on page 82 Disconnect RF2 RF2 input off: Signal applied to the RF2 input is not measured (instead the signal path of the calibration signal is used). Frequency lock Frequency does not change when you turn the rotary knob.
  • Page 77 ® Getting Started R&S ZNL/ZNLE Operating the instrument Some controls on the softtool tabs allow you to read and modify settings (e.g. "Ref Value" in the screenshot above), some perform actions (e.g. "Auto Scale Trace"), while others open additional dialogs (button label ends with "...").

  • Page 78: Entering Data

    ® Getting Started R&S ZNL/ZNLE Operating the instrument The on-screen keyboard display can be switched on and off as desired using the "On- Screen Keyboard" function key beneath the screen. When you press this key, the display switches between the following options: ●...

  • Page 79: Touchscreen Gestures

    ® Getting Started R&S ZNL/ZNLE Operating the instrument 2. After entering the numeric value via keypad, press the corresponding unit key. The unit is added to the entry. 3. If the parameter does not require a unit, confirm the entered value by pressing the [ENTER] key or any of the unit keys.
  • Page 80 ® Getting Started R&S ZNL/ZNLE Operating the instrument Figure 4-18: Tapping Double-tapping Tap the screen twice, in quick succession. Double-tap a diagram or the window title bar to maximize a window in the display, or to restore the original size.
  • Page 81 ® Getting Started R&S ZNL/ZNLE Operating the instrument Figure 4-20: Pinching Figure 4-21: Spreading Touch gestures in diagrams change measurement settings When you change the display using touch gestures, the corresponding measurement settings are adapted. This is different to selecting an area on the screen in zoom mode, where merely the resolution of the displayed trace points is changed temporarily (graphical zoom).

  • Page 82: Getting Help

    4.4.5 Getting help If any questions or problems concerning the R&S ZNL/ZNLE arise, an extensive online help system is provided on the instrument and can be consulted at any time. The help system is context-sensitive and provides information specifically for the current opera- tion or setting to be performed.
  • Page 83 ® Getting Started R&S ZNL/ZNLE Operating the instrument 2. Select the screen element to change the focus. A topic containing information about the selected (now focused) screen element is displayed. User Manual 1178.5966.02 ─ 19...

  • Page 84: Operating Modes, Applications, Channel Setups, And Result Displays

    5 Operating modes, applications, channel set- ups, and result displays If the spectrum analysis hardware option R&S ZNLxx-B1 is installed, the R&S ZNL is actually two instruments in one: a vector network analyzer (VNA) and a spectrum ana- lyzer (SA). The R&S ZNL integrates the functionality of the two as separate operating modes in one instrument.

  • Page 85: Available Applications

    Note: For the R&S ZNLE and for R&S ZNL14 and R&S ZNL20 with serial numbers below 101200, a spectrum analysis hardware option is not available. The "Spectrum" application is described in the R&S ZNL Spectrum Analyzer Mode User Manual. Remote command:...

  • Page 86: R&S Multiview

    Note: For the R&S ZNLE and for R&S ZNL14 and R&S ZNL20 with serial numbers below 101200, a spectrum analysis hardware option is not available. The "I/Q Analyzer" application is described in the R&S ZNL "I/Q Analyzer" User Man- ual.

  • Page 87: Defining Channel Setups

    ® Operating modes, applications, channel setups, and result displays R&S ZNL/ZNLE Defining channel setups 5.3 Defining channel setups Access: [Mode] For a R&S ZNLxx with spectrum analysis option R&S ZNLxx-B1, the startup/preset channel setup is determined by the Preset Mode. Factory default is "VNA". For the R&S ZNLE this is the only available application.
  • Page 88 ® Operating modes, applications, channel setups, and result displays R&S ZNL/ZNLE Defining channel setups Figure 5-1: Defining Channel Setups (R&S ZNLxx with spectrum analysis option R&S ZNLxx-B1) Switching between channel setups When you switch to a new channel setup, a set of parameters is passed on from the current channel setup to the new one: ●...

  • Page 89: Running A Sequence Of Measurements

    ® Operating modes, applications, channel setups, and result displays R&S ZNL/ZNLE Running a sequence of measurements Note: The channel setups are labeled with the application name. If that name already exists, a sequential number is added. You can change the name of the channel setup by double-tapping the name in the channel setup bar and entering a new name.
  • Page 90 ® Operating modes, applications, channel setups, and result displays R&S ZNL/ZNLE Running a sequence of measurements For each individual measurement, the sweep count is considered. Thus, each mea- surement may consist of several sweeps. The currently active measurement is indica- ted by a symbol in the tab label.
  • Page 91 ® Operating modes, applications, channel setups, and result displays R&S ZNL/ZNLE Running a sequence of measurements Example: Sequencer procedure Assume the following active channel setup definition: Tab name Application Sweep mode Sweep count Cont. Sweep Spectrum Spectrum Cont. Sweep Spectrum 2...

  • Page 92: Sequencer Settings

    ® Operating modes, applications, channel setups, and result displays R&S ZNL/ZNLE Running a sequence of measurements Run Single/Run Cont and Single Sweep/Sweep Continuous keys While the Sequencer is active, the [Run Single] and [Run Cont] keys control the Sequencer, not individual sweeps. [Run Single] starts the Sequencer in single mode, while [Run Cont] starts the Sequencer in continuous mode.
  • Page 93 ® Operating modes, applications, channel setups, and result displays R&S ZNL/ZNLE Running a sequence of measurements 1. Configure a channel setup for each measurement configuration as required, includ- ing the sweep mode. 2. In the toolbar, select the "Sequencer" icon.

  • Page 94: Data Management

    6.1 Restoring the default instrument configuration (pre- set) When delivered, the R&S ZNL/ZNLE has a default configuration. You can restore this defined initial state at any time as a known starting point for measurements. This is often recommendable as a first step in troubleshooting when unusual measurement results arise.

  • Page 95: Storing And Recalling Instrument Settings And Measurement Data

    NOT restored. ● The procedure above applies to spectrum mode only (n.a. for R&S ZNLE). ● For the R&S ZNL/ZNLE a single channel setup can only be reset via remote con- trol. Remote command: on page 588 SYSTem:PRESet:CHANnel[:EXEC] 6.2 Storing and recalling instrument settings and mea-...

  • Page 96: Quick Save/Quick Recall

    R&S ZNL/ZNLE without these options. ● Files created with newer firmware versions may not work with a previous version. ● Files created on an instrument other than the R&S ZNL/ZNLE do not work on the R&S ZNL/ZNLE. ● Quick save/quick recall...................
  • Page 97 ® Data management R&S ZNL/ZNLE Storing and recalling instrument settings and measurement data QuickSave 1 / ... / QuickSave 10.................. 97 └ Rename......................98 └ Write Protection....................98 Storage Type (Save only)....................98 Recall..........................98 QuickSave 1 / ... / QuickSave 10 Selects one of the save sets to store the current settings in or to be recalled.

  • Page 98: Configurable Storage And Recall

    6.2.2.1 Stored data types The following types of data can be stored to and loaded from files via the "Save" dialog box on the R&S ZNL/ZNLE: Table 6-1: Items that can be stored to files Item Description Current Settings Current instrument and measurement settings.
  • Page 99 ® Data management R&S ZNL/ZNLE Storing and recalling instrument settings and measurement data 6.2.2.2 Storage location and filename The data is stored on the internal flash disk or, if selected, on a memory stick or net- work drive. The operating system, firmware and stored instrument settings are located on drive C.
  • Page 100 ® Data management R&S ZNL/ZNLE Storing and recalling instrument settings and measurement data Selecting Storage Location - Drive/ Path/ Files............100 File name........................100 Comment........................100 File Explorer........................ 101 File Type ........................101 Items:.......................... 101 Save File........................101 Recall in New Channel / Recall in Current Channel............101...
  • Page 101 ® Data management R&S ZNL/ZNLE Storing and recalling instrument settings and measurement data File Explorer Opens the Microsoft Windows File Explorer. Remote command: not supported File Type Determines whether the global instrument settings with all "Channel"s are stored or recalled, or the current "Channel" settings only.
  • Page 102 ® Data management R&S ZNL/ZNLE Storing and recalling instrument settings and measurement data Startup Recall......................102 Selecting Storage Location - Drive/ Path/ Files............102 File name........................102 Comment........................103 Startup Recall Activates or deactivates the startup recall function. If activated, the settings stored in the selected file are loaded each time the instrument is started or preset.

  • Page 103: How To Save And Load Instrument Settings

    ® Data management R&S ZNL/ZNLE Storing and recalling instrument settings and measurement data Comment An optional description for the data file. A maximum of 60 characters can be displayed. Remote command: on page 577 MMEMory:COMMent 6.2.3 How to save and load instrument settings Instrument settings can be saved to a file and loaded again later, so that you can repeat the measurement with the same settings.
  • Page 104 "The setup data changed while loading" is displayed. This may happen, for example, if you attempt to load a channel setup of a different R&S ZNL/ZNLE model or with different optioning. To recall settings automatically after preset or reboot You can define the settings that are restored when you preset or reboot the instrument.

  • Page 105: Creating Screenshots Of Current Measurement Results And Settings

    ® Data management R&S ZNL/ZNLE Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings 5. Set "Startup Recall" to "On". Now when you press the [PRESET] key or reboot the instrument, the defined set- tings will be restored. 6. To restore the factory preset settings, set "Startup Recall" to "Off".
  • Page 106 ® Data management R&S ZNL/ZNLE Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings Print Screenshot......................107 Print Multiple Windows....................107 Comment........................107 Print Logo........................107 Print Page Count......................107 Print Dialog........................107 Print Date and Time....................108 User Manual 1178.5966.02 ─ 19...
  • Page 107 ® Data management R&S ZNL/ZNLE Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings Print Screenshot Selects all measurement results displayed on the screen for the current channel setup (or "MultiView" ): diagrams, traces, markers, marker lists, limit lines, etc., including the channel bar and status bar, for printout on a single page.
  • Page 108 ® Data management R&S ZNL/ZNLE Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings This setting is only available if Print Screenshot is selected. Print Date and Time Includes or removes the current date and time at the bottom of the printout.
  • Page 109 ® Data management R&S ZNL/ZNLE Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings Zoom In / Zoom Out....................109 Page........................110 Zoom 1:1........................110 Page Up / Page Down....................110 Print..........................110 Zoom In / Zoom Out Zooms into (enlarges) or zooms out of (decreases) the preview display. Note that the zoom functions affect only the preview, not the printout itself.
  • Page 110 ® Data management R&S ZNL/ZNLE Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings Fit Page Adapts the preview display zoom factor so that one complete page is visible as large as possible in the available display space. Note that the zoom functions affect only the preview, not the printout itself.
  • Page 111 ® Data management R&S ZNL/ZNLE Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings Destination........................111 └ Destination: File.................... 112 └ Destination: Clipboard...................112 └ Destination: Printer..................112 Suppress File Name Dialog..................112 Printer Name....................... 112 Print to file........................112 Install Printer........................113 Destination Defines the medium to which the printout is output.
  • Page 112 ® Data management R&S ZNL/ZNLE Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings Destination: File ← Destination Stores the printout to a file in the selected format. The filename is queried at the time of storage, or a default name is used (see Suppress File Name Dialog).
  • Page 113 ® Data management R&S ZNL/ZNLE Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings Remote command: To enable: HCOP:DEST1 'MMEM' To disable: HCOP:DEST1 'SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter' Install Printer This softkey opens the standard Windows dialog box to install a new printer. All print- ers that are already installed are displayed.
  • Page 114 ® Data management R&S ZNL/ZNLE Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings Windows Per Page Defines how many windows are displayed on a single page of the printout. This setting is only available if Print Multiple Windows is active (see Chapter 6.3.1.1, "Print content...

  • Page 115: How To Store Or Print Screenshots Of The Display

    598. To start printing or storing results to a file ► If the R&S ZNL/ZNLE has already been set up according to your current require- ments, simply press the "Print immediate" icon at the far right end of the toolbar.
  • Page 116 ® Data management R&S ZNL/ZNLE Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings 2. In the "Content" tab, define the elements of the screen and additional information to be included in the printout. a) Select "Print Screenshot" to include all elements displayed on the screen in a single-page printout.
  • Page 117 ® Data management R&S ZNL/ZNLE Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings b) Select the result displays in the currently selected channel setup to be included in the printout. Tip: Select the "MultiView" before configuring the printout to include result dis- plays from any active channel setup.

  • Page 118: General Instrument Setup

    Settings for network and remote operation are described in Chapter 8.4, "Network and remote control settings", on page 154. Settings for the optional "Spectrum" mode are described in the R&S ZNL/ZNLE "Spec- trum" mode user manual. ● Reference frequency..................... 118 ●...

  • Page 119: Display Settings

    ® General instrument setup R&S ZNL/ZNLE Display settings OCXO Option The OCXO (R&S FPL1-B4) option generates a 10 MHz reference signal with a very precise frequency. If installed, and if no external signal is used, this signal is used as an internal reference.
  • Page 120 ® General instrument setup R&S ZNL/ZNLE Display settings Deactivating and Activating the Touchscreen............. 120 Display Update Rate....................120 Set Date and Time ..................... 120 Date and Time Format ....................121 Background Lighting....................121 Deactivating and Activating the Touchscreen The touchscreen function can be deactivated, e.g. when the instrument is being used for demonstration purposes and tapping the screen must not provoke an action.
  • Page 121 ® General instrument setup R&S ZNL/ZNLE Display settings Select the "Set Date and Time" button in the "Display" dialog box, or select the date and time display in the status bar to open the Windows dialog box. Remote command: on page 611...
  • Page 122 ® General instrument setup R&S ZNL/ZNLE Display settings Date and Time......................123 Front Panel........................123 Mini Front Panel......................123 Toolbar The toolbar provides access to frequently used functions via icons at the top of the screen. Some functions, such as zooming, finding help, printing screenshots or storing and loading files are not accessible at all without the toolbar.
  • Page 123 The "Front Panel" display simulates the entire front panel of the device (except for the external connectors) on the screen. Thus, you can interact with the R&S ZNL/ZNLE without the keypad and keys on the front panel of the device. That is useful, for exam- ple, when working with an external monitor or operating via remote control from a com- puter.
  • Page 124 ® General instrument setup R&S ZNL/ZNLE Display settings Note: You can also activate the mini front panel using the key combination [ALT + m] (be aware of the keyboard language defined in the operating system!). That is useful when you are working from a remote PC and the front panel function is not active.
  • Page 125 ® General instrument setup R&S ZNL/ZNLE Display settings Theme......................... 125 Print Colors......................... 125 Showing Print Colors on Display.................126 Theme The theme defines the colors and style used to display softkeys and other screen objects. The default theme is "IndustrialDark". Remote command:...

  • Page 126: How To Work With The Soft Front Panels

    Screen resolution and format The touchscreen of the R&S ZNL/ZNLE is calibrated for a 16:10 format. If you connect a monitor or projector using a different format (e.g. 4:3), the calibration is not correct and the screen does not react to your touch actions properly.

  • Page 127: Language Settings

    7.3 Language settings Access: [SETUP] > "Language" The graphical user interface of the R&S ZNL/ZNLE can be displayed in various lan- guages so you can operate the instrument in your most familiar language. ► Select the language from the list of available languages.

  • Page 128: System Configuration Settings

    7.4.1 Hardware information Access: [Setup] > "System Configuration" > "Hardware Info" An overview of the installed hardware in your R&S ZNL/ZNLE is provided. Every listed component is described by its serial number, part number, model informa- tion, hardware code, and hardware revision.
  • Page 129 If an option has already expired, a message box appears for you to confirm. In this case, all instrument functions are unavailable (including remote control) until the R&S ZNL/ZNLE is rebooted. You must then use the "Install Option" function to enter the new license key.

  • Page 130: System Messages

    Opens an edit dialog box to enter the license key for the option that you want to install. Install Option by XML Opens a file selection dialog box to install an additional option to the R&S ZNL/ZNLE using an XML file. Enter or browse for the name of an XML file that contains the option key and select "Select".

  • Page 131: Firmware Updates

    System messages. The firmware on your R&S ZNL/ZNLE may also need to be updated in order to enable additional new features or if reasons for improvement come up. Ask your sales repre- sentative or check the Rohde&Schwarz website for availability of firmware updates. A firmware update package includes at least a setup file and release notes.
  • Page 132 4. Select the "Firmware Update" tab. 5. In the file selection dialog box select the ZNLSetup*.exe file. "File Explorer": Instead of using the file manager of the R&S ZNL/ZNLE firmware, you can also use the Microsoft Windows File Explorer to manage files.

  • Page 133: General Configuration Settings

    Note: Do not switch off the instrument during the reconfiguration process! Now the firmware update is complete. 7.4.5 General configuration settings Access: [Setup] > "System Configuration" > "Config" General system settings, for example concerning the initial behaviour of the R&S ZNL/ ZNLE after booting, can also be configured. Preset Mode........................133 Out-of-range value behavior..................

  • Page 134: Service Functions

    These options are not available for the R&S ZNLE. Wait for Trigger Polarity In Spectrum operating mode, the optional AUX PORT connector of the R&S ZNL can provide a signal that indicates the instrument is ready to receive a trigger signal.

  • Page 135: R&S Support Information

    Creates a *.zip file with important support information. The *.zip file contains the sys- tem configuration information ( "Device Footprint" ), the current eeprom data and a screenshot of the screen display. This data is stored to the C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\ZNL directory on the instrument. User Manual 1178.5966.02 ─ 19...

  • Page 136: Self-Test Settings And Results

    7.5.2 Self-test settings and results Access: [Setup] > "Service" > "Selftest" If the R&S ZNL/ZNLE fails you can perform a self-test of the instrument to identify any defective modules. Once the self-test is started, all modules are checked consecutively and the test result is displayed.

  • Page 137: Calibration Signal Display

    ® General instrument setup R&S ZNL/ZNLE Service functions 7.5.3 Calibration signal display Access: [Setup] > "Service" > "Calibration Signal" Alternatively to the RF input signal from the front panel connector you can use the instrument's calibration signal as the input signal, for example to perform service func- tions on.

  • Page 138: Service Functions

    Using service functions The service functions are not necessary for normal measurement operation. Incorrect use can affect correct operation and/or data integrity of the R&S ZNL/ZNLE. Therefore, many of the functions can only be used after entering a password. These functions are described in the instrument service manual.

  • Page 139: Vna Setup

    Most service functions require a special password as they may disrupt normal opera- tion of the R&S ZNL/ZNLE. There are different levels of service functions, depending on how restrictive their use is handled. Each service level has a different password.

  • Page 140: Calibration Tab

    ® General instrument setup R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA setup ● Calibration tab.......................140 ● User Interface tab....................141 ● Advanced tab......................143 ● Power tab......................145 7.6.1 Calibration tab Provides general system error correction (calibration) settings. Auto Power Setting for Cal Unit Sets the source power at all test ports to -10 dBm while an automatic calibration is active.

  • Page 141: User Interface Tab

    VNA application is started. It is pos- sible to select the default cal kit directory C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\ZNL\Calibration\Kits or any other directory. "None" means that no additional cal kit files are loaded on start-up.
  • Page 142 If enabled, those beeps are generated even if "Sounds" is unchecked. Note: The R&S ZNL/ZNLE does not have a built-in audio device and loudspeaker. To hear sounds, connect a USB audio device to the instrument or operate it via remote desktop.

  • Page 143: Advanced Tab

    Remote command: Units Prefix Sets the unit prefix for frequencies (Base unit: Hz) to kilo (k), mega (M), giga (G) or tera (T) or lets the R&S ZNL/ZNLE select the appropriate prefix ("Auto" = default set- ting). Remote command: Reset Dialogs / Reset Decimal Places / Reset Units Prefix Resets the dialog properties, the "Decimal Places"...
  • Page 144 ® General instrument setup R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA setup If "Geometric Calculation of Bandfilter Center" is checked, the geometric mean of the lower band edge and upper band edge frequencies is used, otherwise their arithmetic mean. Remote command: CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:BWIDth:GMCenter Touchstone Export Options Configures whitespace insertion during legacy Version 1.1 (ZNx)

  • Page 145: Power Tab

    ® General instrument setup R&S ZNL/ZNLE Toolbar configuration 7.6.4 Power tab The settings in this tab define global power settings of the VNA. Power Reduction at Sweep End The power reduction settings apply to all sweep modes but are particularly useful in single sweep mode.
  • Page 146 However, you can configure which icons are displayed in the toolbar, and in which order. Toolbar configuration is saved when you shut down or preset the R&S ZNL/ZNLE. It is not included in save sets (see Chapter 6.2, "Storing and recalling instrument settings and measurement data",...

  • Page 147: Network And Remote Settings

    Remote control interfaces and protocols 8 Network and remote settings In addition to working with the R&S ZNL/ZNLE interactively, located directly at the instrument, it is also possible to operate and control it from a remote PC. Various meth- ods for remote control are supported: ●...

  • Page 148: Lan Interface

    Chapter 8.3, "VISA libraries", on page 154 for details. The R&S ZNL/ZNLE supports various LAN protocols such as VXI11, RSIB, raw socket or the HiSLIP protocol. IP address Only the IP address or a valid DNS host name is required to set up the connection.
  • Page 149 ® Network and remote settings R&S ZNL/ZNLE Remote control interfaces and protocols – hislip0 selects the newer HiSLIP protocol ● INSTR indicates the instrument resource class (optional) ● port determines the used port number ● SOCKET indicates the raw network socket resource class Example: ●...
  • Page 150 The instrument's LAN web browser interface works correctly with all W3C compliant browsers. Via the web browser interface to the R&S ZNL/ZNLE you can control the instrument remotely from another PC. Manual instrument controls are available via the front panel simulation.
  • Page 151 For details, see Chapter 8.5.1.4, "How to configure the LAN using the web browser interface", on page 168 and Chapter 8.5.5, "How to control the R&S ZNL/ZNLE via the web browser interface", on page 174. If you do not want other users in the LAN to be able to access and operate the R&S ZNL/ZNLE you can deactivate this function.

  • Page 152: Gpib Interface (Iec 625/Ieee 418 Bus Interface)

    8.1.2 GPIB interface (IEC 625/IEEE 418 bus interface) An optional GPIB interface can be integrated on the rear panel of the instrument. By connecting a PC to the R&S ZNL/ZNLE via the GPIB connection you can send remote commands to control and operate the instrument.
  • Page 153 ® Network and remote settings R&S ZNL/ZNLE Remote control interfaces and protocols 8.1.2.1 GPIB interface messages Interface messages are transmitted to the instrument on the data lines, with the atten- tion line (ATN) being active (LOW). They are used for communication between the con- troller and the instrument and can only be sent by a computer which has the function of a GPIB bus controller.

  • Page 154: Scpi (Standard Commands For Programmable Instruments)

    SCPI commands - messages - are used for remote control. Commands that are not taken from the SCPI standard follow the SCPI syntax rules. The R&S ZNL/ZNLE sup- ports the SCPI version 1999. The SCPI standard is based on standard IEEE 488.2 and aims at the standardization of device-specific commands, error handling and the status registers.

  • Page 155: General Network Settings

    8.4.1 General network settings Access: [SETUP] > "Network + Remote" > "Network" tab The R&S ZNL/ZNLE can be operated in a local area network (LAN), for example to control the instrument from a remote PC or use a network printer.

  • Page 156: Remote Settings

    Opens the standard Windows "Network Configuration" dialog box for further configura- tion. 8.4.2 Remote settings Access: [Setup] > "Network + Remote" > "Remote" tab GPIB-specific settings are only available if option R&S FPL1-B10 is installed on the R&S ZNL/ZNLE. User Manual 1178.5966.02 ─ 19...
  • Page 157 Defines the GPIB address. Values from 0 to 30 are allowed. The default address is 20. Remote command: on page 613 SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess Identification String Defines the identification string for the R&S ZNL/ZNLE which is provided as a response to the *IDN? query. Maximum 36 characters are allowed. Remote command: on page 616 SYSTem:IDENtify[:STRing] Reset to Factory String Restores the default identification string.
  • Page 158 SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:RTERminator I/O Logging Activates or deactivates the SCPI error log function. All remote control commands received by the R&S ZNL/ZNLE are recorded in a log file. The files are named accord- ing to the following syntax: \Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\ZNL\ScpiLogging\ScpiLog.<no.> where <no.> is a sequential number A new log file is started each time logging was stopped and is restarted.

  • Page 159: Compatibility Settings

    8.4.3 Compatibility settings Access: [SETUP] > "Network+Remote" > "Compatibility" The R&S ZNL/ZNLE can emulate the GPIB interface of other signal and spectrum ana- lyzers, e.g. in order to use existing control applications. Compatibility with former R&S signal and spectrum analyzers As a rule, the R&S ZNL/ZNLE supports most commands from previous R&S signal and...

  • Page 160: Lan Settings

    SYSTem:LANGuage 8.4.4 LAN settings Access: [SETUP] > "Network + Remote" > "LAN" tab In a LAN network, the R&S ZNL/ZNLE can be accessed via any web browser (e.g. the Microsoft Internet Explorer) to perform the following tasks: ● Modifying network configurations ●...

  • Page 161: Remote Errors

    Current LAN Configuration..................161 Password......................161 Reset........................161 Current LAN Configuration Displays the current LAN information from the R&S ZNL/ZNLE (read-only). Name of the R&S ZNL/ZNLE as defined in the operating system (see "Computer name" also "Computer Name" on page 156) "MAC address"...
  • Page 162 If the number of error messages exceeds the capacity of the error buffer, the oldest error message is removed before the newest one is inserted. To clear the message buffer use the "Clear Error List" button. It is automatically cleared when the R&S ZNL/ ZNLE is shut down.

  • Page 163: Returning To Manual Mode ("Local")

    ® Network and remote settings R&S ZNL/ZNLE Network and remote control settings Remote command: on page 619 SYSTem:ERRor:CLEar:REMote 8.4.6 Returning to manual mode ("local") When switched on, the instrument is always in the manual measurement mode and can be operated via the front panel. As soon as the instrument receives a remote com- mand, it is switched to the remote control mode.

  • Page 164: How To Set Up A Network And Remote Control

    In production test and measurement, a common requirement is central monitoring of the T&M instruments for remote maintenance and remote diagnostics. Equipped with the Remote Desktop software of Windows, the R&S ZNL/ZNLE ideally meets require- ments for use in production. The computer that is used for remote operation is called "controller"...
  • Page 165 IP address", on page 165. Note: As the R&S ZNL/ZNLE uses a 1 GBit LAN, a crossover cable is not neces- sary (due to Auto-MDI(X) functionality). ► To establish a non-dedicated network connection, connect a commercial RJ-45 cable to one of the LAN ports.
  • Page 166 ® Network and remote settings R&S ZNL/ZNLE How to set up a network and remote control Assigning the IP address on the instrument Risk of network errors Connection errors can affect the entire network. Contact your network administrator to obtain a valid IP address.
  • Page 167 How to set up a network and remote control Using a DNS server to determine the IP address If a DNS server is configured on the R&S ZNL/ZNLE, the server can determine the cur- rent IP address for the connection using the permanent computer name.
  • Page 168 ® Network and remote settings R&S ZNL/ZNLE How to set up a network and remote control Each instrument is delivered with an assigned computer name, but this name can be changed. To change the instrument's computer name 1. Press the [Setup] key and then the "Network + Remote" softkey.
  • Page 169 ® Network and remote settings R&S ZNL/ZNLE How to set up a network and remote control ► Press the "Device Indicator" button on the "Instrument Home Page" to activate or deactivate the "LXI" status LED to the right of the button. A green "LXI" status LED indicates that a LAN connection has been established;...

  • Page 170: How To Operate The Instrument Without A Network

    The GPIB address is maintained after a reset of the instrument settings. Setting the GPIB address 1. On the R&S ZNL/ZNLE, press the [SETUP] key. 2. Press the "Network + Remote" softkey. 3. In the "Network + Remote" dialog box, select the "GPIB" tab.

  • Page 171: How To Log On To The Network

    (= default user ID for Windows auto-login) in the network. Thus, a matching user must be created in the R&S ZNL/ZNLE and in the network, the password must be adapted to the network password, and the auto-login mechanism must then be deactivated.
  • Page 172 If you change the password that is used during auto-login, this function no longer works. Adapt the settings for the auto-login function first. 1. Select the "Windows" icon in the toolbar to access the operating system of the R&S ZNL/ZNLE (see also "To access the "Start" menu" on page 35).

  • Page 173: How To Share Directories (Only With Microsoft Networks)

    ® Network and remote settings R&S ZNL/ZNLE How to set up a network and remote control The "Login" dialog box is displayed, in which you can enter the different user account name and password. Deactivating the auto-login function When shipped, the instrument is already configured to automatically log on the "instru- ment"...

  • Page 174: How To Control The R&S Znl/Znle Via The Web Browser Interface

    8.5.5 How to control the R&S ZNL/ZNLE via the web browser interface Via the LAN web browser interface to the R&S ZNL/ZNLE, one or more users can con- trol the instrument remotely from another PC without additional installation. Most instru- ment controls are available via the front panel simulation.

  • Page 175: How To Deactivate The Web Browser Interface

    My Computer folder, from which you can access all other folders on the instrument. 3. To download a file from the R&S ZNL/ZNLE, select the file from the displayed fold- ers and then select "Download File".

  • Page 176: How To Set Up Remote Desktop

    Windows, Microsoft offers the Remote Desktop Client as an add-on. For details refer to the Windows operating system documentation. With the factory settings, the default "instrument" user can connect to the R&S ZNL/ ZNLE with the Remote Desktop program of the controller immediately. No further con- figuration is required.
  • Page 177 When a DHCP server is used, a new IP address is assigned each time the instru- ment is restarted. This address must first be determined on the instrument itself. Thus, using a DHCP server is not suitable for remote operation of the R&S ZNL/ ZNLE via Remote Desktop.
  • Page 178 Network and remote settings R&S ZNL/ZNLE How to set up a network and remote control 7. The R&S ZNL/ZNLE is now ready for connection setup with the Remote Desktop program of the controller. 8.5.7.2 How to configure the controller Remote Desktop Client With Windows, Remote Desktop Client is part of the operating system and can be accessed via "Start >...
  • Page 179 7. Open the "Local Resources" tab for enabling printers, local drives and serial inter- faces. 8. If you will need to access drives of the controller from the R&S ZNL/ZNLE (e.g. in order to store settings or to copy files from the controller to the R&S ZNL/ZNLE), select "More", then enable the "Drives"...
  • Page 180 7. After a few moments, the R&S ZNL/ZNLE screen is displayed. If a dark screen appears or a dark square appears in the upper left-hand corner of the screen, you must restart the R&S ZNL/ZNLE in order to see the modified screen resolution.
  • Page 181 R&S ZNL/ZNLE screen. To terminate Remote Desktop control The connection can be terminated by the controller or by a user at the R&S ZNL/ZNLE: 1. On the controller, close the "Remote Desktop" window at any time. The connection to the R&S ZNL/ZNLE is terminated.

  • Page 182: How To Start A Remote Control Session From A Pc

    How to set up a network and remote control Restoring the connection to the R&S ZNL/ZNLE Follow the instructions above for setting up a connection to the R&S ZNL/ZNLE. If the connection is terminated and then restored, the R&S ZNL/ZNLE remains in the same state.

  • Page 183: How To Return To Manual Operation

    Switching to manual mode is only possible via remote control then. This function is only available for the GPIB interface. 5. To enable the keys of the R&S ZNL/ZNLE again, switch the instrument to local mode (GTL - Go to Local), i.e. deactivate the REN line of the remote control inter- face.

  • Page 184: Vna Concepts And Features

    ● Calibration kits ● Connector types ● Calibration pool: power correction data (R&S ZNL only), and system error correc- tion data ● Directories for trace data, limit lines, calibration data etc. ● Global VNA mode settings, to be accessed via [Setup] > "VNA Setup"...

  • Page 185: Channel Setups

    9.1.2 Channel setups A channel setup comprises a set of diagrams together with the underlying system, channel, trace and display settings. The R&S ZNL/ZNLE can handle multiple channel setups in parallel, each of them displayed in a separate tab. Either the active channel setup or the set of all open channel setups can be saved to a settings file (*.dfl) and recalled at a later point in time or at another instrument.
  • Page 186 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Basic concepts 9.1.3.1 Trace settings The trace settings specify the mathematical operations used to obtain traces from the measured or stored data. They can be divided into several main groups: ● Selection of the measured quantity (S-parameters, wave quantities, ratios, impe- dances,...)

  • Page 187: Sweep Control

    The analyzer can perform: ● Sweeps at constant power but variable frequency (frequency sweeps) ● Sweeps at constant frequency but variable power (power sweeps; R&S ZNL only) ● Sweeps at constant power and frequency that are repeated in time (Time/CW Mode sweeps) The sweeps are further specified by the number of measurement points and the total measurement time.
  • Page 188 To improve the accuracy, it is possible to insert a delay time before each partial mea- surement. In the default "Alternated" driving mode, the R&S ZNL/ZNLE performs a partial mea- surement at all sweep points (partial sweep) before the hardware settings are changed.
  • Page 189 "Start Frequency" (Hz) "Stop Frequency" (Hz) "Segmented" – – "Power" "CW Frequency" (Hz) "Stop Power" (dBm) (R&S ZNL only) "CW Mode" "CW Frequency" (Hz) "Number of Points" (-) "Time" "CW Frequency" (Hz) "Stop Time" (s) User Manual 1178.5966.02 ─ 19...

  • Page 190: Data Flow

    (in segment 2) etc. ● "Power" (R&S ZNL only) Start and stop power are both entered in absolute units (dBm). Start and stop power must be different; the stop power must be larger than the start power. If a stop power smaller than the start power is set, then the start power is adjusted automatically and vice versa.
  • Page 191 SYSTEM POWER CORRECTION SYST. ERR. ERROR CORRECTION (User) CORRECTION CORRECTION DATA DATA (User) R&S ZNL only S-parameters Wave quantities with wave de-/embedding Wave quantities without DEEMBEDDING wave de-/embedding EMBEDDING OFFSET Single Ended > (Alternative 1) Ground Loop > Port Set >...
  • Page 192 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Basic concepts 9.1.5.2 Trace data flow The diagram below illustrates the processing stages the channel measurement data run through for each individual trace. Again, all stages are configurable. User Manual 1178.5966.02 ─ 19...
  • Page 193 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Basic concepts Channel data flow for all traces AVERAGE of the channel Trace 1 Mem 1,1 Mem 1,2 Trace 2 Mem 2,1 Mem 2,2 Unformatted Trace data flow TRACE MATH for individual traces...

  • Page 194: Vna Screen Elements

    ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA screen elements 9.2 VNA screen elements This section describes manual operation of the VNA mode, including trace settings, markers and diagrams. For a description of the different quantities measured by the instrument, refer to Chapter 9.3, "Measurement...
  • Page 195 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA screen elements 9.2.1.1 Title An optional title across the top of the diagram can be used for a brief description of the diagram contents. Select [Display Lines] > "Diagram" > "Title" to enter the diagram title and "Show Title"...
  • Page 196 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA screen elements The type of each trace in a diagram is indicated in the trace list: "MEM<no>" at the beginning of the trace name indicates a memory trace (with default naming), Math at the end of the trace label indicates a mathematical trace.
  • Page 197 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA screen elements Example: The following context menu is assigned to the measured quantity section in the trace list: A label "Cal Off" appears at the end of the trace line if the system error correction no longer applies to the trace.
  • Page 198 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA screen elements The most common tasks to be performed with markers can be achieved using the "Marker" menu functions: ● Determine the coordinates of a measurement point on the trace. In polar diagrams where no x-axis is displayed, markers can be used to retrieve the stimulus value of specific points.
  • Page 199 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA screen elements ● The marker coordinates are expressed in one of the marker formats selected via [Mkr] > "Marker Props" > "Marker Format". The formats of the markers assigned to a trace are independent of each other and of the trace format settings.
  • Page 200 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA screen elements The following table describes how a complex marker value z = x + jy is converted. It makes use of the polar representation z = x + jy = |z| e jφ(z)
  • Page 201 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA screen elements Marker Format Description Formula Imp Mag paral- Magnitude of parallel impedance | = (R lel***) Adm Mag Magnitude of (series) admittance | = (G Adm Mag series***) Adm Mag paral-...
  • Page 202 Bandfilter search In a bandfilter search, the R&S ZNL/ZNLE locates trace segments with a bandpass or bandstop shape and determines characteristic filter parameters. Bandpass and bandstop regions can be described with the same parameter set: ●...
  • Page 203 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA screen elements ● "Center" is calculated as the geometric or arithmetic mean of the lower band edge frequency f and the upper band edge frequency f = sqrt (f (geometric mean) or...
  • Page 204 The values behind the color legend show the constant stimulus value, which is either the power of the internal signal source (for frequency sweeps and time sweeps) or the CW frequency (for power sweeps; R&S ZNL only), and the mea- surement bandwidth ("BW").

  • Page 205: Dialogs

    ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA screen elements Example: The following context menu is assigned to the channel name section in the channel list: The functions of the context menu can also be called from the related softtool panels.
  • Page 206 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA screen elements numeric value is incremented or decremented, or when display elements are added or removed. In most dialogs, however, it is possible to cancel an erroneous input before it takes effect. The settings in such dialogs must be confirmed explicitly.

  • Page 207: Trace Formats

    If "Ask Before Overwriting" is enabled, overwriting an existing file has to be con- firmed. 9.2.3 Trace formats A trace format defines how a trace is represented in a diagram. The R&S ZNL/ZNLE supports the following trace formats: ● Cartesian trace formats "dB Mag", "Phase", "SWR", "Unwr Phase", "Lin Mag", "Log Mag", "Real", "Imag"...
  • Page 208 Cartesian trace formats assign a scalar response to the stimulus value, which can be frequency, power (R&S ZNL only), or time. The response can be calculated from the measured quantity at the related stimulus value, but it can also be the result of some mathematical transformation of the original (unformatted) trace.
  • Page 209 Conversion of complex to real quantities Among the measured quantities the VNA supports, only "Power Sensor" results (R&S ZNL only) and "Stability" factors are real. All other measured quantities are com- plex. The following table shows how "real" response values are calculated from complex measurement values z = x + j y (where x, y, z are functions of the sweep variable).
  • Page 210 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA screen elements In a diagram the grid lines overlaid to the trace correspond to points of equal magni- tude and phase: ● Points with equal magnitude are located on circles around the complex 0 that is located at the center of the diagram.
  • Page 211 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA screen elements In a diagram, the grid lines overlaid to a "Smith" trace correspond to points of equal resistance R and reactance X: ● Points with the same resistance are located on circles.
  • Page 212 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA screen elements Example: Reflection coefficients in the Smith chart If the measured quantity is a complex reflection coefficient Γ (e.g. S ), then the unit Smith chart can be used to read the normalized impedance of the DUT. The coor-...
  • Page 213 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA screen elements Inv Smith For "Inv Smith" formatted traces, the response values are interpreted as complex reflection coefficients S and represented in terms of their corresponding complex admittance Y(S ) = G(S ) + j B(S In a diagram, the grid lines overlaid to a "Smith"...
  • Page 214 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA screen elements ● The upper and lower half of the diagram correspond to negative (inductive) and positive (capacitive) susceptive components of the admittance, respectively. Example: Reflection coefficients in the inverted Smith chart If the measured quantity is a complex reflection coefficient Γ...

  • Page 215: Measurement Results

    ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Measurement results 9.2.3.3 Measured quantities and trace formats The analyzer allows any combination of a display format and a measured quantity. The following rules can help to avoid inappropriate formats and find the format that is ide- ally suited to the measurement task.

  • Page 216: S-Parameters

    ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Measurement results 9.3.1 S-parameters S-parameters are the basic measured quantities of a network analyzer. They describe how the DUT modifies a signal that is transmitted or reflected in forward or reverse direction. For a 2-port measurement, the signal flow is as follows.

  • Page 217: Reference Impedances

    ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Measurement results Table 9-3: Squared S-parameters Available incident power (= the power provided by a generator with a source impedance equal to the reference impedance Z ) at DUT port i=1,2 Reflected power at DUT port i=1,2...
  • Page 218 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Measurement results The renormalized wave quantities (a and b ) and the S-matrix S can be calculated from S and the reference impedances Z according to two alternative waveguide circuit theories. 1. Traveling waves In the model of Marks and Williams ("A General Waveguide Circuit Theory"), the...

  • Page 219: Impedance Parameters

    ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Measurement results 9.3.3 Impedance parameters An impedance is the complex ratio between a voltage and a current. The analyzer pro- vides two independent sets of impedance parameters: ● Converted impedances (each impedance parameter is obtained from a single S- parameter) ●...
  • Page 220 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Measurement results Table 9-4: Calculation of Converted Reflection Impedances Traveling Waves Power Waves Series transmission impedance A two-port transmission parameter Z (i ≠ j) can describe a pure serial impedance between the two ports.
  • Page 221 The shunt-thru method is used for measuring very low impedances. A typical applica- tion are measurements on power distribution network (PDN) components, such as bypass capacitors and DC-DC converters. The R&S ZNL/ZNLE uses S (i≠j) to calculate the DUT impedance using the formula: 9.3.3.2...

  • Page 222: Admittance Parameters

    ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Measurement results     Meaning of Z-parameters The four 2-port Z-parameters can be interpreted as follows: ● is the input impedance, defined as the ratio of the voltage V to the current I measured at port 1 (forward measurement with open output, I = 0).

  • Page 223: Wave Quantities And Ratios

    ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Measurement results This means that Y-parameters can be used as an alternative to S-parameters (or Z- parameters) to characterize a linear n-port network completely. 2-port Y-parameters In analogy to S-parameters, Y-parameters are expressed as Y , where <out>...
  • Page 224 Use of the analyzer as a selective power meter. To increase the accuracy or to correct a possible attenuation in the source signal path, it is recommended to perform a power calibration (R&S ZNL only; see Chap- ter 9.5.6, "Scalar power calibration",...

  • Page 225: Unbalance-Balance Conversion

    ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Measurement results Examples for using ratios A measurement of ratios is particularly suitable for the following test scenarios: ● The test setup or some of its components (e.g. active components or non-recipro- cal devices) do not allow a system error correction so that a complete S-parameter measurement is not possible.
  • Page 226 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Measurement results Internal balance- unbalance conversion Logical Physical VNA ports VNA ports Common Differential mode mode Balanced port Physical transformer (balun) Unbalance-balance conversion avoids the disadvantages of real transformers: ● There is no need to fabricate test fixtures with integrated baluns for each type of DUT.
  • Page 227 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Measurement results 9.3.6.2 Mixed-mode parameters Mixed mode parameters are an extension of normal mode parameters (e.g. S-parame- ters, impedances and admittances) for balanced measurements. The analyzer can measure mixed mode parameters once a balanced port configuration is selected.

  • Page 228: Stability Factors

    ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Measurement results Mixed-mode parameters for different test setups Which types of mixed mode parameter are available depends on the measured device and the port configuration of the analyzer. The following examples of mixed mode parameters can be measured with a 2-port analyzer.

  • Page 229: Group Delay

    ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Measurement results References: Marion Lee Edwards and Jeffrey H. Sinsky, "A New Criterion for Linear 2- Port Stability Using a Single Geometrically Derived Parameter", IEEE Trans. MTT, vol. 40, No. 12, pp. 2303-2311, Dec. 1992.

  • Page 230: Operations On Traces

    Chapter 9.7, "Optional extensions and accessories", on page 293. The R&S ZNL/ZNLE can also check whether the measured values comply with speci- fied limits and export trace data, using different file formats. 9.4.1 Limit check A limit line restricts the allowed range for some or all points of a trace, i.e. for a certain range of stimulus values.
  • Page 231 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Operations on traces The following rules ensure a maximum of flexibility: ● Segments do not have to be sorted in ascending or descending order (e.g. the "Start Stimulus" value of segment no. n does not have to be smaller than the "Start Stimulus"...
  • Page 232 While "Show Limit Line" is active, the diagrams display all limit line segments. Exception: In a segmented frequency sweep with point-based x-axis, gaps between the segments are minimized. To facilitate the interpretation, the R&S ZNL/ZNLE dis- plays only the limit line segments which provide the limit check criterion (the "tighter"...
  • Page 233 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Operations on traces 9.4.1.2 Rules for ripple test definition The analyzer places few restrictions on the definition of ripple limit ranges. The following rules ensure a maximum of flexibility: ● Ranges do not have to be sorted in ascending or descending order (e.g. the "Start Stimulus"...
  • Page 234 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Operations on traces The limit line rules for logarithmic sweeps and segmented frequency sweeps with point-based x-axis also apply to ripple limit lines (see Chapter 9.4.1.1, "Rules for limit line definition", on page 230).
  • Page 235 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Operations on traces ● With a circle limit line centered on the left border of an inverted Smith diagram (Y = infinity), you can check whether the imaginary part of the admittance (Im(Y), sus- ceptance) falls below a limit.
  • Page 236 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Operations on traces 9.4.1.4 File format for limit lines The analyzer uses a simple ASCII format to export limit line data. By default, the limit line file has the extension *.limit and is stored in the directory shown in the "Save Limit Line"...

  • Page 237: Trace Files

    9.4.2 Trace files The R&S ZNL/ZNLE can store one or several data or memory traces to a file or load a memory trace from a file. Trace files are ASCII files with selectable file format. The analyzer provides several types of trace files: ●...
  • Page 238 ● Touchstone File Format Specification Version 2.0 The R&S ZNL/ZNLE supports Touchstone file versions 1.1 and 2.0. By convention, Touchstone files use file extensions .snp, where n is the number of network ports. The following displays an s1p export file in "Version 1.1 (ZNx)" format: 50.00...
  • Page 239 The R&S ZNL/ZNLE always uses HZ for exported data. ● <parameter> specifies what kind of network parameter data is contained in the file. Default is S for S-parameters, which is the only parameter type the R&S ZNL/ ZNLE supports. ●...
  • Page 240 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Operations on traces The first line is fixed, the second reflects the configurable identification string of the instrument. Timestamp The timestamp comment line reflects the time at which the Touchstone file was cre- ated.
  • Page 241 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Operations on traces ! freq[Hz] re:Sdd11 im:Sdd22 re:Scd22 im:Scd22 re:Sdc22 im: Sdc22 re:Scc22 im:Scc22 ● "Version 1.1" and "Version 2.0" export formats These export formats always use single-ended identifiers Sij and port numbers 1 to n in the table header.
  • Page 242 Operations on traces The purpose of the keywords is to give more details about the file contents in a stand- ardized way. During "Version 2.0" export, the R&S ZNL/ZNLE writes the following key- words to the generated Touchstone file: Keyword...
  • Page 243 During export, the segments are always kept together, which can result in downward "frequency jumps" at segment borders. Data arrangement During export, for each block, the R&S ZNL/ZNLE arranges the frequency value f and network parameter data (Nij) as described in the Touchstone 1.1 standard.
  • Page 244 Note that when reimporting this type of file into standard applications (including the R&S ZNL/ZNLE itself), the <reference resistance> of the Touchstone option line is used and the impedance system underlying the data is not interpreted cor- rectly.
  • Page 245 Import the created file into a spreadsheet application such as Microsoft Excel. ● Export an arbitrary number of traces, multiple traces with the same parameter or memory traces. ● Export traces acquired in a power sweep (R&S ZNL only) or CW sweep. User Manual 1178.5966.02 ─ 19...

  • Page 246: Memory-Mapped Trace Data Transfer

    ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Operations on traces ● Export time domain traces ● Use export options. Use the Matlab (*.dat) format if you want to import and process the trace data in Matlab. 9.4.3 Memory-mapped trace data transfer The VNA firmware uses the Named Shared Memory Windows feature to share trace data with other processes running on the instrument.

  • Page 247: Calibration

    ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Calibration b) SYSTem:DATA:MEMory:ADD '<TrName2>', FDATA|SDATa, #Values2 to query the offset in bytes of the sec- SYSTem:DATA:MEMory:OFFSet? ond trace data block. Processes that want to read the trace data from the buffer need to know this offset. Its size depends on whether the first trace data block contains formatted (real) or unformatted (complex) values.
  • Page 248 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Calibration 2. The analyzer compares the measurement data of the standards with their known, ideal response. The difference is used to calculate the system errors using a partic- ular error model (calibration type) and derive a set of system error correction data.

  • Page 249: Calibration Types

    ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Calibration Calibration and port de-/activation The analyzer fimware automatically activates/deactivates ports during/after a (success- ful) calibration: ● Calibrated ports that were previously disabled, are automatically enabled as single- ended logical ports. ● An uncalibrated port that is not used by a measurement (i.e. the port is not required by any trace of the related channel) is disabled.
  • Page 250 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Calibration Calibration Type Standards Parameters Error Terms General Accuracy Application Reflect (at both Reflection tracking, High, high directiv- Reflection and ports), transmission mea- (2-port) Source match, surements, espe- Through, Line1, Directivity, cially for planar cir- other Lines cuits.
  • Page 251 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Calibration Complementary Match standard measurements For reflection normalizations, the mandatory Open or Short measurements can be complemented by optional Match measurements. Additionally, measuring a Match standard allows you to eliminate errors due to the directivity of the internal couplers, which improves the accuracy of reflection measurements on well-matched DUTs (high return loss).
  • Page 252 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Calibration 9.5.1.4 TOSM and UOSM calibration TOSM A TOSM (Through – Open – Short – Match) calibration requires the same standards as the one path two ports calibration, however, all measurements are performed in the for- ward and reverse direction.
  • Page 253 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Calibration less, and its length must be exactly known. The length of the Line standard must be known approximately. Furthermore, a reflecting one-port standard (Reflect) is needed. The magnitude of the reflection coefficient of the Reflect standard can be unknown but must be nonzero; its phase must be roughly known (90 deg).
  • Page 254 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Calibration ● For a TRL calibration with 2 Lines, a second Line standard must be measured in addition. ● For higher precision at low frequencies, the Reflect and Match standards at both ports and the Through must be measured. See also Chapter 9.5.2.3, "Sliding...

  • Page 255: Calibration Standards And Calibration Kits

    ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Calibration Accuracy for low frequencies TRL calibration becomes inaccurate if the electrical length difference between Line and Through standard corresponds to a phase shift below 20°. In practice, TRL is only practicable above a threshold frequency c /[18*(l –...
  • Page 256 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Calibration also determines the equivalent circuit model used to describe its properties. The circuit model depends on several parameters that are stored in the cal kit file associated with the calibration kit. As an alternative to using circuit models, it is possible to describe the standards with S- parameter tables stored in a file.
  • Page 257 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Calibration measure for the length of transmission line between the standard and the actual calibration plane. For a waveguide with permittivity ε and mechanical length L mech the following relations hold:  ...
  • Page 258 The precision of the calibration kit parameters determines the accuracy of the system error correction and of the measurements. The R&S ZNL/ZNLE displays a warning if you use a typical or ideal parameter set to calibrate a channel.
  • Page 259 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Calibration Table 9-9: Ideal standard parameters Standard (Gender) R (Load) Electrical Length (Offset) ∞ Ω Open (f, m) 0 mm (Delay: 0 s) Short (f, m) 0 Ω 0 mm Offset Short (f, m) 0 Ω...
  • Page 260 Sliding Match have been measured. However, it is often desir- able to acquire calibration data from both standards. The R&S ZNL/ZNLE can acquire correction data for up to 20 positions. The analyzer combines the data in an appropriate manner: ●...
  • Page 261 On loading some older R&S ZVR-specific *.ck files, e.g. the R&S ZV-Z23 cal kit file, the R&S ZNL/ZNLE generates the message "File does not comply with instrument cali- bration kit file format". The files must be converted using an R&S ZVR network ana- lyzer equipped with a firmware version V3.52 or later.

  • Page 262: Calibration Pool

    The calibration "Pool" is a collection of correction data sets (cal groups) that the ana- lyzer stores in a common directory C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\ZNL\Calibration\Data. Cal groups in the pool can be applied to different channels and channel setups. Each cal group is stored in a separate file named <CalGroup_name>.cal. The cal group name can be changed in the "Calibration Manager"...
  • Page 263 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Calibration Advantages of automatic calibration Automatic calibration is faster and more secure than manual calibration, because: ● There is no need to connect several standards manually. The number of connec- tions to be performed quickly increases with the number of ports.
  • Page 264 Recommended use ● The calibration unit is intended for direct connection to R&S ZNL/ZNLE network analyzers following the procedure described above. You can also connect the unit before switching on the analyzer. Do not connect the unit to other USB hosts, e.g.
  • Page 265 (suitable for the cal unit with adapters) may be desirable. The R&S ZNL/ZNLE provides a characterization wizard which you can use to generate your own characterization data sets for (modified) R&S cal units. The characterization data can be stored in the cal unit and used for automatic calibration whenever needed.
  • Page 266 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Calibration A cal unit characterization can be performed in a frequency sweep. The network ana- lyzer must be properly calibrated, with the reference plane at the input ports of the (modified) cal unit to be characterized.
  • Page 267 Control connections are established via a central Inline Calibration Controller (ICC) with: ● 2 CAN bus interfaces for connecting the ICUs ● USB and LAN interface for remote control (from the R&S ZNL/ZNLE or a standard Windows PC) User Manual 1178.5966.02 ─ 19...
  • Page 268 For more information, see the R&S ZN-Z3x product pages at https://www.rohde- schwarz.com/product/NetworkAnalyzer_Acc_ZNZ3. Firmware integration The control connection between R&S ZNL/ZNLE and ICC is established via USB. After the VNA firmware has detected the ICC, it requests information about connected ICUs from the ICC. User Manual 1178.5966.02 ─ 19...
  • Page 269 ZNL/ZNLE Calibration Because the ICC does not support hot plugging of ICUs, connect the ICUs to the ICC before connecting the ICC to the R&S ZNL/ZNLE. The VNA firmware supports: ● Pulling characterization data for the connected ICUs from the ICC ●...
  • Page 270 SCPI automation. Basic mode When "Cal Validation" is launched for the first time, it runs in basic mode. In this mode, the R&S ZNL/ZNLE automatically detects the instrument ports connected to the cal User Manual 1178.5966.02 ─ 19...
  • Page 271 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Calibration unit, and only validates connected ports. Thus, if a 2-port cal unit is connected to a 4- port calibrated channel, only the two connected instrument ports are validated against the cal unit.

  • Page 272: Scalar Power Calibration

    ZNL/ZNLE Calibration 9.5.6 Scalar power calibration R&S ZNL only The purpose of a scalar power calibration is to ensure accurate source power levels and power readings at a particular position (calibration plane) in the test setup. Scalar power calibration is different from the system error correction described in Chapter 9.5,...
  • Page 273 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Calibration 2. Measurement receiver calibration: The analyzer uses the calibrated source sig- nal to adjust the power reading at the receive port. 9.5.6.1 Source power calibration A source power calibration ensures accurate power levels of the generated waves at an arbitrary calibration plane in the measurement path.
  • Page 274 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Calibration power meter is no longer used for these repeated calibration sweeps; everything is based on the previously calibrated reference receiver. This speeds up the calibra- tion procedure but does not impair its accuracy.
  • Page 275 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Calibration width of 10 kHz. Smaller IF bandwidths are maintained during the calibration sweep; larger bandwidths are restored after the sweep. The analyzer measures the power at each sweep point, compares the result with the nominal power of the source, and com- piles a correction table.
  • Page 276 The known transmission coefficients of the two-port can be entered manually or automatically ([Cal] > "Power Cal Settings" > "Transm. Coefficients..."). The R&S ZNL supports two different test scenarios. A: Two-port at DUT (during measurement) Test and measurement procedure: 1.

  • Page 277: Parallel Calibration Of Multiple Channels

    If multiple channels are configured in the active channel setup, clearly they can be cali- brated one after the other, but this can be inefficient in terms of necessary reconnec- tions of calibration standards (or calibration units). The R&S ZNL/ZNLE offers multiple possibilities to calibrate several channels in paral- lel: ●...

  • Page 278: Offset Parameters

    ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Offset parameters and de-/embedding 9.6.1 Offset parameters Offset parameters compensate for the known length and loss of a (non-dispersive and perfectly matched) transmission line between the calibrated reference plane and the DUT. The analyzer can also auto-determine length and loss parameters, assuming that the actual values should minimize the group delay and loss across a configurable fre- quency range.
  • Page 279 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Offset parameters and de-/embedding If in addition the loss at a second frequency f is known (or measured), then the loss can be approximated by: In practice, the frequency-dependent part ist often dominant, so that Loss can be set to zero.
  • Page 280 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Offset parameters and de-/embedding This yields the delay in one direction and should be approx. equal to the "Auto Length" result. The measurement results using trace formats and trace statistics functions depend on the selected delay aperture and evaluation range.
  • Page 281 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Offset parameters and de-/embedding Preconditions for Auto Length and Loss, effect on measured quantities and exceptions "Auto Length and Loss" is enabled if the measured quantity contains the necessary phase information as a function of the frequency, and if the interpretation of the results is unambiguous: ●...
  • Page 282 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Offset parameters and de-/embedding "Fixture Compensation" complements a previous system error correction and replaces a possible manual length offset and loss correction. For maximum accuracy, it is rec- ommended to place the reference plane as close as possible towards the outer test fix- ture connectors using a full n-port calibration.
  • Page 283 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Offset parameters and de-/embedding help to avoid a new complete system error correction if a cable with known properties has to be included in the test setup. ● A positive length offset moves the reference plane of the port towards the DUT, which is equivalent to deembedding the DUT by numerically removing a (perfectly matched) transmission line at that port.

  • Page 284: Embedding And Deembedding

    Offset parameters and de-/embedding 9.6.2 Embedding and deembedding The R&S ZNL/ZNLE allows you to define virtual networks to be added to/removed from the measurement circuit for a DUT with single ended or balanced ports. This concept is referred to as embedding/deembedding.
  • Page 285 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Offset parameters and de-/embedding which are not directly accessible because they are inseparably connected to other components, e.g. for MMICs in a package or connectors soldered to an adapter board. To be numerically removed, the real network must be described by a set of S-parame- ters or by an equivalent circuit of lumped elements.
  • Page 286 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Offset parameters and de-/embedding Serial C, Shunt L / Serial L, Shunt C / Serial C, Shunt C / Serial L, Shunt L. The following networks are composed of a shunt C or L (as seen from the analyzer port), followed by a serial C or L.
  • Page 287 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Offset parameters and de-/embedding The transformation networks comprise various combinations of 3 basic circuit blocks, where two blocks represent serial elements, the third a shunt element. In the default setting the resistors are not effective, since the serial Rs are set to 0 Ω, the shunt Rs are set to 10 MΩ.
  • Page 288 (L1 = L2 = L3 = 0 H) and R1 = R2 = 0 Ω. To model a general (de-)embedding network for ports 1 and 2, select port pair 1, 2 and a 4-Port Touchstone file. The R&S ZNL/ZNLE FW handles Port Pair De-/Embedding as a special case of Port de-/embedding.
  • Page 289 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Offset parameters and de-/embedding Network Analyzer Embedding Network 2m-1 Figure 9-6: Port Set De-/Embedding As shown in section Combining Several de-/embedding networks, port set deembed- ding is calculated after single-ended deembedding, and the port set embedding step precedes single ended embedding.
  • Page 290 ZNL/ZNLE Offset parameters and de-/embedding ● For the R&S ZNL/ZNLE, each port set can consist of m = 2 ports ● For these port pairs, the de-/embedding network can be defined either via lumped element model (possibly in combination with s2p Touchstone files) or via a s4p Touchstone file, see Chapter 9.6.2.5, "Port pair...
  • Page 291 "Shunt L, Shunt C" element model. 9.6.2.9 Combining Several de-/embedding networks The R&S ZNL/ZNLE allows you to select a combination of networks to be numerically added/removed at different layers ● 2-port networks at single ended physical ports ●...
  • Page 292 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Offset parameters and de-/embedding 3. Balanced Deembedding: every balanced logical port can be deembedded from a single 4-port network 4. Ground Loop Deembedding: the DUT's ground connection can be deembedded from a single 1-port network 5.

  • Page 293: Optional Extensions And Accessories

    The equipped options are listed in the "System Configuration" dialog ([Setup] > "System Config"). Table 9-13: Software options (K-options) Option Option name R&S ZNL-K2 Time domain analysis R&S ZNL-K3 Distance-to-fault measurements Table 9-14: Hardware options (B-options)

  • Page 294: Time Domain Analysis

    For a complete list of options, accessories, and extras refer to the product brochure or to the "Options" section of the R&S ZNL/ZNLE product pages on the Internet. The fol- lowing sections provide an introduction to the software and hardware options described in this documentation.
  • Page 295 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Optional extensions and accessories For a detailed discussion of the time domain transformation including many examples, refer to the application note 1EP83 which is available on the R&S internet at http:// www.rohde-schwarz.com/appnotes/1EP83. This option is also available for the R&S ZNLE.
  • Page 296 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Optional extensions and accessories point at zero frequency (DC value). The time domain result is complex, with an undetermined phase depending on the delay of the signal. ● Low pass mode: The measurement results are continued towards f = 0 (DC value) and mirrored at the frequency origin so that the effective sweep range (and thus the response resolution) is more than doubled.
  • Page 297 The point symmetry with respect to the DC value makes harmonic grids suitable for lowpass time domain transformations. Visualization of the harmonic grid algorithms The R&S ZNL provides three different algorithms for harmonic grid calculation. The three harmonic grids have the following characteristics: ●...
  • Page 298 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Optional extensions and accessories ● Keep "Frequency Gap and Number of Points" means that the number of sweep points and their relative spacing is maintained. If the start frequency of the sweep is sufficiently above the f , the entire set of sweep points is shifted towards lower frequencies so that the stop frequency is decreased.
  • Page 299 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Optional extensions and accessories Finding the appropriate algorithm The three types of harmonic grids have different advantages and drawbacks. Note that for a bandpass transformation the grid parameters have the following effect: ●...

  • Page 300: Distance-To-Fault Measurements

    9.7.2 Distance-to-fault measurements Option R&S ZNL-K3 With option K3 "Distance-to-Fault", the R&S ZNL/ZNLE can locate faults and disconti- nuities on cables and transmission lines. This option is also available for the R&S ZNLE.
  • Page 301 However, a smaller frequency span comes at the cost of a coarser distance resolu- tion. The R&S ZNL/ZNLE can automatically determine a suitable number of sweep points for a given maximum distance to fault ("Auto Number of Points"). Moreover it is possi-...

  • Page 302: Spectrum Analyzer Function

    For all other R&S ZNL, it can be retrofitted at Rohde&Schwarz service. ● Option R&S ZNL20-B1 supports frequencies up to 26.5 GHz. ● The following additional options are only available if the R&S ZNL is equipped with the spectrum analysis option: – R&S FPL1-B11 "YIG preselector bypass" (R&S ZNL14|20 only) –...

  • Page 303: Additional Removable Pc Board With Ssd

    9.7.4 Additional removable PC board with SSD Option R&S ZNL-B19 Option R&S ZNL/ZNLE-B19 provides an additional removable PC board for the R&S ZNL, including an SSD with operating system and VNA firmware. For the R&S ZNLE, this option is not available.

  • Page 304: Lower Start Frequency For R&S Znle

    An optional OCXO improves the static frequency accuracy of the R&S ZNL. For details, refer to the data sheet. This option is not available for the R&S ZNLE. For the R&S ZNL, it can be retrofitted by Rohde&Schwarz service. 9.7.9 Additional interfaces Option R&S FPL1-B5...

  • Page 305: Gpib Interface

    9.7.12 DC power supply 12/24 V R&S FPL1-B30 A R&S ZNL that is equipped with this user-retrofitable plugin-unit can be connected to DC power supplies from +12 V to +24 V and from 13 A to 6.5 A. This option is not available for the R&S ZNLE.

  • Page 306: Internal Li-Ion Batteries

    AC or DC power supply. The instrument can house 2 Li-Ion batter- ies which can be charged both via AC or DC power supply. This option is not available for the R&S ZNLE. For the R&S ZNL, it can be retrofitted by Rohde&Schwarz service.
  • Page 307 R&S ZNL, e.g. in power calibration dialogs. R&S FPL1-K9 With this software license, a R&S ZNL with spectrum analysis option R&S ZNL-B1 can perform power sensor measurements in spectrum mode, using power sensors of the R&S NRP-Zxy family. The power sensors can be connected via USB or via the Sensor...
  • Page 308 ® VNA concepts and features R&S ZNL/ZNLE Optional extensions and accessories meter model; refer to the documentation of your external power meter for more infor- mation. Repeat zeroing ● During warm-up after switching on or connecting the instrument ● After a substantial change of the ambient temperature ●...

  • Page 309: Vna Gui Reference

    This chapter describes the Graphical User Interface (GUI) of the VNA mode of the R&S ZNL/ZNLE. For the R&S ZNLE, only this mode is available. The most convenient way to access the GUI functions is via Softtools. Hence the GUI reference is structured accordingly.

  • Page 310: Stimulus Softtool

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Stimulus softtool Table 10-1: Function keys and softtools Keyboard Related Soft- Action Shortcut tool [Freq] Alt + Shift + J Stimulus soft- Selects an input field corresponding to the fre- tool quency or span of the active channel's current...

  • Page 311: Stimulus Tab

    The following "Stimulus" settings are also available on the "Power" tab: ● Power ● Start Power / Stop Power (R&S ZNL only) Start Frequency / Stop Frequency / Center Frequency / Span Frequency Defines the sweep range for non-segmented frequency sweeps. For a Lin Freq sweep, setting "Start Frequency"...

  • Page 312: Power Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Stimulus softtool For a Log Freq only "Start Frequency" and "Stop Frequency" can be set. Note: For segmented frequency sweeps the start and stop frequencies and the num- ber of sweep points are defined per segment. See Chapter 10.5.2.2, "Define Segments...
  • Page 313 Controls on the Power tab left = R&S ZNL with Receiver step attenuators middle = R&S ZNL without receiver step attenuators right = R&S ZNLE Power Determines the output power at the test ports for the sweep types "Lin Freq", "Log Freq", "CW Mode", and "Time".

  • Page 314: Time Domain Tab

    10.2.3 Time Domain tab If the active trace is a time domain trace, these settings define its stimulus axis. ● Time domain analysis requires option R&S ZNL-K2. If this option is not installed, the "Time Domain" tab is hidden. ●...
  • Page 315 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Stimulus softtool Time Start / Time Stop / Time Center / Time Span Defines the display range for the time domain trace in time representation (see " Time / Distance" on page 315). ●...

  • Page 316: Scale Softtool

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Scale softtool The velocity factor of the receiving port can be defined using [Offset Embed] > "Offset" (see "Permittivity / Velocity Factor" on page 543). Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:XAXis Rise Time/Rise Time Def. Allows you to get and set the effective rise time for the configured time domain stimu- lus.
  • Page 317 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Scale softtool The "Scale Values" settings depend on the current trace format (diagram type) because not all diagrams can be scaled in the same way: ● In Cartesian diagrams, all scale settings are available.
  • Page 318 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Scale softtool Auto Scale Diag. (Common Scale) Similar to "Auto Scale Diagram" on page 317, but scales equally formatted traces together. Ref Value = Marker "Ref Val = Marker / Max = Marker / Min = Marker"...

  • Page 319: Scale Coupling Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Scale softtool Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:Y[:SCALe]:TOP DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:Y[:SCALe]:BOTTom Continuous Auto Scale Trace Similar to Auto Scale Trace, but applies auto-scaling continuously, even during a run- ning sweep. Remote command: n.a. 10.3.2 Scale Coupling tab Selects common scale settings for all traces. The softkeys are available if the active channel setup contains at least two traces, and if the active trace is not a reference trace ("To Trace").

  • Page 320: Zoom Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Scale softtool Decouple All Traces / Decouple Trc Assigns independent scale settings to all traces / to the active trace. Remote command: 10.3.3 Zoom tab Provides graphical and stimulus zoom functions for cartesian diagrams.
  • Page 321 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Scale softtool Remote command: n.a. Zoom Select/Stim. Zoom Select Prepares the analyzer GUI for the selection of a (paraxial) rectangular zoom area. The effect of the subsequent selection depends on the current zoom mode...

  • Page 322: Bw Avg Power Softtool

    Chapter 10.2.2, "Power tab", on page 312. 10.4.2 Bandwidth tab Sets the measurement bandwidth and the shape of the digital IF filter (R&S ZNL only) for the active channel. A system error correction (calibration) remains valid when the filter settings are changed.

  • Page 323: Average Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Bw Avg Power softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]BANDwidth[:RESolution] [SENSe<Ch>:]BWIDth[:RESolution] Selectivity Selects the shape of the IF filter: ● Filters with "Normal" selectivity provide the shortest settling time (recommended for fast measurements). ● "Medium" selectivity filters have steeper edges but require longer settling times.

  • Page 324: Sweep Softtool

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Sweep Softtool Factor / On / Reset "Factor" defines the number of averaged traces, "On" enables or disables the sweep average, "Reset" starts a new average cycle. The average cycle is also restarted when averaging mode is changed.

  • Page 325: Sweep Params Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Sweep Softtool Access: [Sweep] hardkey Background information Refer to the following sections: ● Chapter 9.1.4, "Sweep control", on page 187 ● Chapter 9.1.4.2, "Stimulus and sweep types", on page 189 10.5.1 Sweep Params tab Allows you to define the scope and timing of the measurement in the active channel.
  • Page 326 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Sweep Softtool The sweep points for linear frequency sweeps can also be defined using the Freq Step Size. Tip: Measurement time and screen resolution Increasing the number of sweep points improves the resolution of the trace but increa- ses the measurement time.

  • Page 327: Sweep Type Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Sweep Softtool If a time sweep is active, "Sweep Time" cannot be modified. The analyzer uses the previously defined sweep time settings. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TIME [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO Meas Delay Adds a delay time before the start of every partial measurement. See Chapter 9.1.4.1,...
  • Page 328 Sweep Softtool 10.5.2.1 Controls on the Sweep Type tab Figure 10-2: Sweep Type tab: R&S ZNL (left) vs. R&S ZNLE (right) Lin Freq In a linear frequency sweep, the stimulus frequency is swept in equidistant steps over the continuous frequency range. The frequency range (sweep range) and the internal generator power can be specified in the "Stimulus"...
  • Page 329 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Sweep Softtool Log Freq In a "Log Freq" sweep, the stimulus frequency is swept on a logarithmic scale over the continuous frequency range. The frequency range (sweep range) and the internal gen- erator power can be specified in the "Stimulus" settings (see Chapter 10.2.1, "Stimulus...
  • Page 330 Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TYPE SEGMent Power (R&S ZNL only!) In a "Power" sweep, the internal generator power is swept in dB-linear, equidistant steps over a continuous power range. The generator power range (sweep range) and the fixed frequency can be specified in the "Stimulus" settings (see Chapter 10.2.1,...
  • Page 331 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Sweep Softtool The measurement is triggered according to the current trigger settings (see Chap- ter 10.5.3, "Trigger tab", on page 338). Each trigger event triggers the first partial mea- surement of a measurement point. The time interval between two consecutive mea- surements depends on the trigger settings and the sweep parameters (especially the number of points).
  • Page 332 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Sweep Softtool Tip: Sweep time The minimum sweep time depends on the number of measurement points, the mea- surement bandwidth, the delay time before each partial measurement and the number of partial measurements required for each measurement point. The analyzer estimates this time, based on the current measurement settings.
  • Page 333 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Sweep Softtool Tip: Overlapping limit line and ripple limit line segments are not displayed when a point-based x-axis is active; see Chapter 9.4.1.1, "Rules for limit line definition", on page 230. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:SEGMent:AXIS 10.5.2.2...
  • Page 334 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Sweep Softtool ● Sweep segments are allowed to overlap. ● In contrast to standard frequency sweeps, the start and stop frequency in a sweep segment do not have to be different. So with a segmented sweep you can measure n...
  • Page 335 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Sweep Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent:COUNt? [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>[:STATe] [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:STARt [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:STOP [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:CENTer? [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:SPAN? [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:SWEep:POINts Add / Insert / Delete / Delete All The four buttons below the segment list extend or shorten the list. ● "Add" adds a new segment to the end of the list.
  • Page 336 [Hz], en:IF Selectivity, en:IF Sideband, Meas Delay [µs], bo:Sweep Time Auto,en:Frq Sweep Mode. The R&S ZNL/ZNLE only supports the "Stepped" frequency sweep mode. Hence the content of the last column is always Stepped. During import, other values are silently replaced.
  • Page 337 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Sweep Softtool Related information Refer to the following sections: ● Chapter 10.5.2.2, "Define Segments dialog", on page 333 ● "Show Point List..." on page 335 Optional Columns Each selected (checked) option adds a column to the segment list and the point list.

  • Page 338: Trigger Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Sweep Softtool ted). "Segment Time" indicates the estimated sweep time, depending on the cur- rent measurement settings, the "Meas Delay" is 0 s. The segment sweep time and point delay values are maintained until changed explicitly if "Auto" is switched off.
  • Page 339 – BNC connector Trigger In – Pin 2 of the Aux. Port connector (R&S ZNL only, requires Additional interfaces option R&S FPL1-B5) The trigger inputs are equivalent; no additional setting for signal routing is required. For detailed specifications of the trigger signals, refer to Chapter 14.2.1.1, "Aux.
  • Page 340 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Sweep Softtool In particular, it is possible to use two different external trigger sources (R&S ZNL only). Remote command: TRIGger<Ch>[:SEQuence]:SOURce EXTernal Manual Trigger Generates the trigger event for "Manual" trigger mode and is disabled unless this mode is active.
  • Page 341 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Sweep Softtool Delay Specifies a delay time between the trigger event and the start of the next measurement sequence. The specified "Delay" must be zero or positive, so that the trigger event precedes the start of the measurement (post-trigger).
  • Page 342 The column "Slope / Level 2" is only available, if the instrument is equipped with a sec- ond external trigger input. This second external trigger input is provided by the Aux. Port connector, which is part of option R&S FPL1-B5 "Additional Interfaces" (R&S ZNL only).

  • Page 343: Sweep Control Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Sweep Softtool For example, a new sweep can be triggered by an external trigger no. 1, while the indi- vidual sweep points are triggered by external trigger no. 2. External trigger 1 is ignored if a sweep is running, external trigger 2 is ignored if there is no running sweep.
  • Page 344 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Sweep Softtool Restart Sweep initiates a new measurement cycle. This setting applies to the active channel. Remote command: INITiate<Ch>:CONTinuous See also: CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:MEASure[:STATe] CONFigure:CHANnel:MEASure:ALL[:STATe] Sweeps Defines the number of sweeps to be performed in "Single" sweep mode (see "Continu-...
  • Page 345 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Sweep Softtool Sweep Controller Activates/deactivates the (resizable) "Sweep Info" dialog, which displays the current sweep stage. The "Sweep Info" dialog is particularly useful for long duration sweeps that are executed in single sweep mode: by observing the dialog, it is easy to realize when the sweep is done.

  • Page 346: Trace Softtool

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trace softtool Sweep All Channels/Sweeps If you select "Sweep All Channels", Restart Sweep restarts the sweep in all channels of the active channel setup. The number of sweeps in "Single" sweep mode channel is channel-specific and can be defined in the table below the separator line.
  • Page 347 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trace softtool Related information Refer to Chapter 9.1.3, "Traces, channels and diagrams", on page 185. In remote control, each channel can contain an active trace. The active remote traces and the active manual trace are independent of each other; see Chapter 11.4.2.2,...
  • Page 348 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trace softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:PARameter:COPY Trc<n>[, 0] Add Trace + Diagram Copies the active trace (within the active channel), assigns it to a new diagram, and makes the new trace the active one. "Copies" means that the new trace is created with the settings of the former active trace.
  • Page 349 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trace softtool Disable all other Measurements/Enable all Measurements Toggle button with alternating caption. ● "Disable all Disables all channels, except the active one ● Disables all traces in the active channel, except the active one other Measure- ●...
  • Page 350 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trace softtool The analyzer can define mathematical relations between different traces and calculate new mathematical traces ("User Def Math"). The trace names are used as operands in the mathematical expressions and must be distinguished from the mathematical opera- tors +, -, *, /, (, ) etc., which places some restrictions on the syntax of trace names.

  • Page 351: Mem Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trace softtool For data traces previously assigned to the same channel, new channels are cre- ated based on the original channel's settings. Data traces and their associated memory traces are assigned to the same channel.
  • Page 352 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trace softtool The following display settings of a data trace and the associated memory traces are fully coupled. Changing a property of one trace affects the properties of all other traces. ● All "Format" settings (see Chapter 10.8, "Format...

  • Page 353: All Mem All Data Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trace softtool For the relation between a data trace and its associated memory traces, see "Coupling of data and memory traces" on page 351. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:MEMorize TRACe:COPY:MATH Destination Selects the destination for the Data to <Destination>...
  • Page 354 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trace softtool All Data to <Destination> Stores the current data of all data traces in the active channel setup to memory traces, in accordance with the Destination setting. No trace functions are applied to the stored traces.

  • Page 355: Math Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trace softtool Remote command: Show All Data / Hide All Data / Show All Mem / Hide All Mem Displays or hides all data or memory traces in the active channel setup. Hidden traces are not deleted.
  • Page 356 E.g., if no "User Defined" mathematical relation is defined, a memory trace must be coupled to the active data trace, so that the R&S ZNL/ZNLE can evaluate one of the relations "Data / <Mem>" or "Data - <Mem>".
  • Page 357 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trace softtool This function is disabled unless a memory trace is coupled to the active data trace. Trace coupling ensures that the two traces have the same number of points so that the mathematical trace is well-defined.
  • Page 358 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trace softtool Expression builder The mathematical expression appears in the upper part of the dialog. The operands and operators in the expression can be selected from a keyboard and the list of "Oper- ands": ●...
  • Page 359 (e.g. 1.1*Data, if a wave quantity is measured) or to a stimulus value of a power sweep (R&S ZNL only). If "Show as": "Power" is selected in the "More Wave Quantities" dialog, the result is converted into a linear power before the selected trace format is applied.

  • Page 360: Time Domain Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trace softtool ● If "Result is Wave Quantity" is disabled, the analyzer assumes that the result of the mathematical expression is dimensionless. Examples for dimensionless expres- sions are all terms proportional to ratios of wave quantities, e.g. Data / Mem2[Trc1].
  • Page 361 VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trace softtool ● Time domain analysis requires option R&S ZNL-K2. If this option is not installed, the "Time Domain" and Time Gate tab tabs are hidden. ● Since firmware version 1.30, this option is also available for the R&S ZNLE.
  • Page 362 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:STIMulus Impulse Response Selects a window type which the R&S ZNL/ZNLE uses to filter the trace in the fre- quency domain. The drop-down list shows the impulse response of a constant trace over a finite sweep range (i.e. a rectangular function) that was filtered using the differ- ent available window types.
  • Page 363 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trace softtool Resolution Enh. Broadens the frequency range that the analyzer considers for the time domain trans- form by a linear factor. A factor of 1 means that the original sweep range and the mea- sured sweep points are used;...
  • Page 364 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trace softtool Set Harmonic Grid and Keep The three buttons provide alternative algorithms for calculation of a harmonic grid, based on the current sweep points. ● Keep "Stop Frequency and Number of Points" calculates a harmonic grid based on the current "Stop Frequency"...

  • Page 365: Time Gate Tab

    ● Time domain analysis requires option R&S ZNL-K2 / R&S ZNLE-K2. If this option is not installed, the Time Domain tab and "Time Gate" tabs are hidden.
  • Page 366 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trace softtool Time Gate Enables or disables the time gate for the time domain and frequency domain traces. "Gat" is displayed in the trace list while the time gate is active. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:STATe Axis Pair "Start Stop"...

  • Page 367: Distance To Fault Tab

    ) shows the distance from the calibrated reference plane; faults appear as peaks above a certain level. If option K3 is not installed on the R&S ZNL/ZNLE, the "Distance to Fault" tab is hid- den. To achieve the best distance resolution, set the sweep span as large as possible and...
  • Page 368 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trace softtool Background information Refer to Chapter 9.7.2, "Distance-to-fault measurements", on page 300. 10.6.7.1 Controls on the Distance to Fault tab The controls on the "Distance to Fault" tab allow you to enable and configure a stan- dard Distance to Fault (DtF) measurement.
  • Page 369 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trace softtool If the active trace is a reflection trace S , the analyzer firmware assumes that the DUT is connected to port p=i. Otherwise it assumes that the DUT is connected to port p=2.
  • Page 370 If the required number of sweep points would be higher than 100001 (the maximum number of sweep points of the R&S ZNL/ZNLE), the analyzer sets N to 100001 and displays the following message box: "OK" reduces the frequency span Δf to Δf = v ·...
  • Page 371 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trace softtool Cable Type... Opens a dialog that allows to select a preconfigured cable type to be used for the cal- culation of the Distance to Fault traces on the active channel. A cable type is defined by its relative permittivity (or its velocity factor), and a frequency-dependent attenuation table.
  • Page 372 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trace softtool Note that the fault limit is handled like any other limit line. When "Fault Limit Check" is enabled, the current "Fault Limit" forms a new upper line segment replacing other pre- viously defined limit lines (see Chapter 10.9.4.2, "Define Limit Lines...
  • Page 373 Available Cable Types... dialog > "Attenuation" column > ... Given the specified attenuation values the R&S ZNL/ZNLE calculates the attenuation factor at the center of the channel's sweep range and corrects the impulse response trace using this attenuation factor Attenuation (f...
  • Page 374 VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trace softtool ● Frequency list If the cable attenuation is specified at several frequency points, the R&S ZNL/ ZNLE calculates the Attenuation (f ) by linear interpolation. If f is below center center (above) the specified frequency range, then Attenuation (f...
  • Page 375 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trace softtool Figure 10-5: Fault List Dock Widget Fault Table The displays a list of all peaks that violate the active Fault Limit. Unless tracking is dis- abled (see "Tracking Enabled" on page 376), the table is updated with every sweep.

  • Page 376: Trace Statistics Tab

    Evaluates statistical and phase information of the entire trace or of a specific evalua- tion range. 10.6.8.1 Controls on the Trace Statistics tab Figure 10-6: Trace Statistics tab: R&S ZNL (left) vs. R&S ZNLE (right) The "Evaluation Range..." button opens the "Evaluation Range" dialog (see Chap- ter 10.6.8.2, "Evaluation Range dialog",...
  • Page 377 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trace softtool Suppose that the trace in the evaluation range contains n stimulus values x and n cor- responding response values y (measurement points). The statistical values are obtained as follows: ● "Min" and "Max" are the largest and the smallest of all response values y ●...
  • Page 378 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trace softtool Phase/El Length Displays or hides the phase delay ("Phs Dly") and the electrical length ("El Len") of the trace in the selected evaluation range ("Evaluation Range..."). The parameters are only available for trace formats that contain phase information, i.e. for the formats "Phase", "Unwr Phase", and the polar diagram formats "Polar", "Smith", "Inv Smith"...
  • Page 379 CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics[:STATe] CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics[:STATe]:AREA Compr. Point / Compr. Val. (R&S ZNL only) Displays or hides all results related to the x dB (or x degrees) compression point of the trace, where x is the selected compression value. To obtain valid compression point results, a power sweep must be active, and the trace format must be dB or phase.
  • Page 380 CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP[:STATe] CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:LEVel CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:PHASe CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RESult? CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics[:STATe]:AREA Reference Value (R&S ZNL only) This control is only available if compression point statistics are calculated. It selects the reference value ("small signal value") for the compression point calculation. "First Point" uses the value at the first point of the selected evaluation range as the reference value (see Chapter 10.6.8.2, "Evaluation Range...
  • Page 381 Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RDOMain:USER CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RDOMain:USER:STARt CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RDOMain:USER:STOP CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RDOMain:USER:SHOW Defined Value (R&S ZNL only) This setting is only visible if "Defined Value" is used as Reference Value. It manually defines the reference value ("small signal value") for the compression point calculation. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RLEVel...

  • Page 382: Smooth Shift Hold Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trace softtool Evaluation Range Selects a predefined evaluation range. Up to 10 different ranges are available for each channel setup. "Full Span" means that the search range is equal to the entire sweep range. The trace statistics functions consider all measurement points with stimulus val- ues x between the "Start"...
  • Page 383 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trace softtool Smoothing Activates the smoothing function for the active trace, which can be a data or a memory trace. With smoothing active, the trace value at each sweep point is replaced by the arith- metic mean of the trace values at the sweep point itself, and at neighboring sweep points (symmetrically, to the left and to the right).
  • Page 384 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trace softtool where N is the number of points of the sweep (or sweep segment for segmented sweeps). Smoothing interval Length: a/100·N Midpoint n – a/100·N/2 n + a/100·N/2 Sweep points inside the smoothing interval The range definition above takes boder cases and rounding into account.
  • Page 385 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trace softtool A "Stimulus" shift can be used in cartesian and in complex diagrams. The visible effect depends on the diagram type: ● In cartesian diagrams, the trace is shifted relative to the markers and the x-axis.

  • Page 386: Infinite Averaging Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trace softtool 10.6.10 Infinite Averaging tab The controls on the "Infinite Averaging " tab allow you configure infinite averaging for the active trace. Infinite averaging means the average at a sweep point is taken over all trace values at this sweep point since the previous restart of the averaging cycle.
  • Page 387 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trace softtool All buttons on the "Trace Data" tab serve as "openers" for related dialogs: ● "Import..." calls up a dialog to load a memory trace from a trace file; see Chap- ter 10.6.11.1, "Import Complex Data dialog",...
  • Page 388 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trace softtool On loading data from a trace file with several traces, the analyzer displays a dialog to select one or more of the traces stored in the file (see Chapter 10.6.11.3, "Select Parameter dialog",...
  • Page 389 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trace softtool Data export can serve many purposes, e.g.: ● To process and evaluate measurement data in an external application. ● To store measurement data and reimport it in a future measurement session. Background information Refer to the following sections: ●...
  • Page 390 For Touchstone file export, it is possible to export the traces of the active channel or of all channels. Consider "Conditions for Touchstone file export" on page 243. In both cases, the R&S ZNL/ZNLE creates one file per channel. File Format Selects the Touchstone file format to be generated. See Chapter 9.4.2.1, "Touchstone files",...
  • Page 391 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trace softtool Normalize with Port-Specific Impedances For Touchstone file export only. If checked, the firmware renormalizes the exported S- parameters according to the port-specific reference impedances instead of a common target impedance of 50 Ω (see "Renormalization of S-parameters"...
  • Page 392 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trace softtool The exported complex trace values are the values at the beginning of the trace data flow. None of the following stages (trace mathematics, shift, time domain gate, trace formatting and smoothing) affects the exported data. "Save" writes the raw stimulus values (frequency/power/time, according to the sweep type) and the raw, complex measurement points to a file.
  • Page 393 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Trace softtool 10.6.11.3 Select Parameter dialog The "Select Parameter" dialog provides a selection of measurement results (e.g. S- parameters) or traces, e.g. for trace import, import of power correction coefficients, limit line import. Access: The dialog may be called from several dialogs, for example on pressing "Open"...

  • Page 394: Meas Softtool

    Meas softtool Checks and Messages in the Dialog After each port or channel selection, the R&S ZNL/ZNLE checks the channel data for compatibility with the trace export conditions. If data from "All Channels" are exported, every channel must contain a compatible set of traces; see "Conditions for Touchstone...

  • Page 395: S-Params Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Meas softtool Efficient trace handling To select a result and display it as a trace, you can simply drag and drop the corre- sponding button into a diagram area. Port activation on demand If a requested result involves disabled ports, but could be calculated if those ports were configured as single-ended ports with "logical port number = physical port number",...
  • Page 396 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Meas softtool In presence of balanced ports, standard S-parameters are defined in the form S<m_out><m_in><out><in>, where output mode <m_out> and input mode <m_in> can be one of: ● d (differential, balanced) ● c (common, balanced) ●...
  • Page 397 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Meas softtool Access: [Meas] > "S-Params" > "S-Param Wizard..." The wizard proceeds in the following steps: 1. Select the test setup. Choose the port setup of the analyzer according to the port configuration of your DUT.
  • Page 398 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Meas softtool Lets you choose the frequency range, and the number of points per sweep. 5. Select the measurement bandwidth and source power. Choose a typical measurement bandwidth and one of three typical source power values.
  • Page 399 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Meas softtool Background information Refer to the following sections: ● Chapter 9.3.6, "Unbalance-balance conversion", on page 225 ● Chapter 9.3.6.1, "Balanced port configurations", on page 226 ● Chapter 9.3.2, "Reference impedances", on page 217 Predefined Config tab The "Predefined Config"...
  • Page 400 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Meas softtool Physical Ports / Logical Ports Allows you to renumber logical ports. Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:LPORt<LogPt> SOURce<Ch>:LPORt<LogPt>:CLEar Define Physical to Logical Port Relation ● To define a balanced port, select two physical ports and tap "Balanced".
  • Page 401 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Meas softtool By default, the reference impedance of a physical port is set to the reference impe- dance of the connector type assigned to the port. However, it can be defined as an arbitrary complex value (renormalization of port impedances). By changing the refer- ence impedance, it is possible to convert the measured values at 50 Ω...

  • Page 402: Ratios Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Meas softtool ● The default value for the common mode is Z = 25 Ω = Z Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]PORT<PhyPt>:ZREFerence [SENSe<Ch>:]LPORt<LogPt>:ZCOMmon [SENSe<Ch>:]LPORt<LogPt>:ZDIFferent Connector Allows you to specify the connector type of the related physical port.
  • Page 403 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Meas softtool The "More Ratios..." button opens the More Ratios dialog which allows to select an arbitrary ratio of wave quantities. b<i> / a<j> Source Port <j> Selects predefined complex ratios of the standard 2-port wave quantities a...
  • Page 404 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Meas softtool Background information Refer to the following sections: ● Chapter 9.3.5.1, "Wave quantities", on page 224 ● Chapter 9.3.5.2, "Ratios", on page 224 The notation for ratios follows the usual scheme of the vector network analyzer: ●...

  • Page 405: Wave Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Meas softtool 10.7.3 Wave tab Selects wave quantities as measured quantities. Background information Refer to Chapter 9.3.5, "Wave quantities and ratios", on page 223. 10.7.3.1 Controls on the Wave tab The "More Wave Quantities..." button opens the...
  • Page 406 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Meas softtool ● "b2 Source Port 2" is the wave received at physical port 2. In a standard S-parame- ter measurement, this wave is fed to the output port (port 2) of the DUT (reverse measurement).

  • Page 407: Z←Sij Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Meas softtool Wave Quantity Selects the type (left pull-down list) and the port number assignment (right pull-down list) of the wave quantitiy. Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "A1" ... CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_Name>", "A1" ... Source > Port Selects the source port for the stimulus signal ("Port 1"...
  • Page 408 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Meas softtool Z←S<out><in> selector Selects a converted impedance parameter as a measured quantity for the active trace. For an n-port vector network analyzer, the pull-down list provides the full set of n impedance parameters.

  • Page 409: Y←Sij Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Meas softtool Model In case a transmission parameter is selected, you can choose between a series (default), a parallel, and a shunt impedance calculation. Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "Z-S12" | "Z-S12SER" | "Z-S12PAR" | ...
  • Page 410 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Meas softtool Y←S<out><in> selector Selects a converted admittance parameter as a measured quantity for the active trace. For an n-port vector network analyzer, the pull-down list provides the full set of n admittance parameters.

  • Page 411: Y-Z-Params Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Meas softtool Balanced Ports... Opens a dialog to configure the logical ports of the analyzer. Chapter 10.7.1.3, "Balanced Ports dialog", on page 398. 10.7.6 Y-Z-Params tab Allows you to select Y- and Z-parameters as measured quantities. Both Y- and Z- parameters can serve as an alternative to S-parameters for characterizing a linear n- port network.
  • Page 412 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Meas softtool Y11/Y12 /Y21/Y22 Selects one of the 2-port Chapter 9.3.4.2, "Y-parameters", on page 222 as a measured quantity for the active trace. The Y-parameters describe the admittances of a DUT with output ports terminated in a short circuit (V = 0).

  • Page 413: Stability Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Meas softtool 10.7.7 Stability tab Selects one of the three two port stability factors K, μ or μ as measured quantities. A typical application of stability factors is to assess the stability of an amplifier. Stability factors cannot be calculated in balanced port configurations.

  • Page 414: Power Sensor Tab

    The power sensor is connected to the VNA (e.g. to the analyzer's USB port) and provides scalar wave quantity results. See Chap- ter 9.7.14, "Power sensor measurements (R&S ZNL only)", on page 306. Some buttons serve as openers for additional dialogs: ●...

  • Page 415: Format Softtool

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Format softtool Power Meter Shows a list of all power meters that have been properly configured. See "Configured Devices" on page 517. The bordered label below displays the type and serial number of the selected power meter.
  • Page 416 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Format softtool Measured quantities and display formats The analyzer allows arbitrary combinations of display formats and measured quantities (see Chapter 10.7, "Meas softtool", on page 394). Nevertheless, to extract useful infor- mation from the data, it is important to select a display format which is appropriate to the analysis of a particular measured quantity.
  • Page 417 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Format softtool Phase Selects a Cartesian diagram with a linear vertical axis to display the phase of a com- plex measured quantity in the range between –180 degrees and +180 degrees. Properties: The stimulus variable appears on the horizontal axis, scaled linearly. The phase of the complex quantity C, i.e.
  • Page 418 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Format softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:FORMat POLar Calculates the standing wave ratio (SWR) from the measured quantity (typically a reflection S-parameter) and displays it in a Cartesian diagram. Properties: The SWR (or voltage standing wave ratio, VSWR) is a measure of the power reflected at the input of the DUT.
  • Page 419 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Format softtool Lin Mag Selects a Cartesian diagram with a linear vertical axis scale to display the magnitude of the measured quantity. Properties: The stimulus variable appears on the horizontal axis, scaled linearly. The magnitude of the complex quantity C, i.e.
  • Page 420 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Format softtool Tip (alternative formats): It is possible to view the magnitude and phase of a complex quantity instead of the real and imaginary part. The magnitude can be displayed on a linear scale or on a logarithmic scale. Both the real and imaginary parts are displayed in the polar diagram.

  • Page 421: Display Lines Softtool

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Display Lines softtool For background information, see Chapter 9.3.8, "Group delay", on page 229. Properties: The delay at each sweep point is computed as: where the aperture Δf is a finite frequency interval around the sweep point f and the analyzer measures the corresponding phase change ΔΦ, which is calculated via a lin-...

  • Page 422: Diagram Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Display Lines softtool Background information for lines settings Refer to Chapter 9.4.1, "Limit check", on page 230. ● Diagram tab......................422 ● Split tab......................... 425 ● Config tab......................427 ● Limit Test tab......................431 ● Ripple Test tab......................
  • Page 423 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Display Lines softtool ● Some of the functions of the Traces tab activate a particular trace including the cor- responding diagram. Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:CATalog? Add Trace + Diagram Creates a diagram and a trace which is displayed in the new diagram. The trace is cre- ated with the channel settings of the previous active trace but with default trace set- tings.
  • Page 424 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Display Lines softtool Show Title Displays or hides the title area of the active diagram. This property can only be set if Title is non-empty. If "Title" is empty, the title area is always hidden Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TITLe[:STATe]...

  • Page 425: Split Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Display Lines softtool Tip: To vary the size and position of the diagram areas, drag and drop the separating frames or use the functions in the "Split" tab. Remote command: DISPlay:LAYout:SPLit 10.9.2 Split tab Arranges multiple diagrams on the screen.
  • Page 426 "Diagram" tab. Remote command: No command; display configuration only. Split Type The R&S ZNL/ZNLE provides the following split types: ● "Lineup": The diagrams are arranged side by side; each diagram occupies the entire screen height.

  • Page 427: Config Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Display Lines softtool Remote command: DISPlay:LAYout Diagrams / Rows / Columns Selects the number of "Diagrams" (or "Rows" and "Columns") to which the traces in the active channel setup are split. The split is performed according to the selected Split Type.
  • Page 428 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Display Lines softtool 10.9.3.1 Controls on the Config tab Hide Sensitive Information Unmasks or masks all stimulus value occurrences in the VNA GUI for the current chan- nel setup. When you check "Hide Sensitive Information" for a particular channel setup (to mask the stimulus values), you are asked to set a password.
  • Page 429 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Display Lines softtool Trace Info Shows or hides the trace lists in the upper part of the diagrams. Remote command: DISPlay:ANNotation:TRACe[:STATe] Info Table: Show / Position Shows or hides the info table and defines its position.
  • Page 430 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Display Lines softtool Use the "Configuration..." button to open the Info Window Configuration dialog select the information items to be displayed. To disambiguate the displayed marker info fields, you can assign descriptive names to the markers (see "Marker Name"...

  • Page 431: Limit Test Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Display Lines softtool Figure 10-9: Content selection: marker info fields Bandfilter search info fields simply pick the results to be displayed. Figure 10-10: Content selection: bandfilter search info fields Remote command: DISPlay:IWINdow:MARKer<Mk>[:STATe] DISPlay:IWINdow:BFILter[:STATe] 10.9.3.3...
  • Page 432 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Display Lines softtool 10.9.4.1 Controls on the Limit Test tab The "Define Limit Line..." button opens the "Define Limit Lines" dialog (see Chap- ter 10.9.4.2, "Define Limit Lines dialog", on page 435). Show Limit Line Shows or hides the limit line associated with the active trace in a Cartesian diagram area.
  • Page 433 No fail beep can be gen- erated if the limit check is switched off. Note: The R&S ZNL/ZNLE does not have a built-in audio device and loudspeaker. To hear sounds, connect a USB audio device to the instrument or operate it via remote desktop.
  • Page 434 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Display Lines softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SOUNd[:STATe] Clear Test Resets the limit check results. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CLEar Global Check Activates or deactivates the global limit check including upper/lower limits and ripple limits. The global limit check is a composite limit check over all traces of the current channel setup.
  • Page 435 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Display Lines softtool Application: Graduated quality check The two pass/fail signals can be used to distinguish three quality levels of a DUT. The test is performed on two identical traces Trc1 and Trc2 within the same channel. Trc1 is configured with a tighter, Trc2 with a looser set of limit lines.
  • Page 436 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Display Lines softtool Creating limit lines with minimum effort Choose one of the following methods to create and handle limit lines efficiently: ● To define limit lines with only a few segments, select "Add" and edit each segment...
  • Page 437 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Display Lines softtool CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CONTrol:SHIFt CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DATA CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:LOWer[:DATA] CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:LOWer:SHIFt CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:UPPer[:DATA] CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:UPPer:FEED CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:INTerpol Add / Insert / Delete / Delete All The first four buttons below the segment list extend or shorten the list. The analyzer places no restriction on the number of segments in a limit line.
  • Page 438 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Display Lines softtool The active trace must be cartesian and the "Format" of the imported trace must be the same as the "Format" of the active trace. ● "Import File..." opens a dialog to load a limit line from a trace file (see Chap- ter 10.6.11, "Trace Data...

  • Page 439: Ripple Test Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Display Lines softtool Both import dialogs contain the following file import settings: ● "Offsets" contains two input fields to define constant offset values for all imported segments. The "Response" offset shifts all segments in vertical direction, the "Stim- ulus"...
  • Page 440 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Display Lines softtool Ripple limits can be defined for cartesian trace formats only and are limited to the trace format they were configured for. If another format is selected, the ripple limit lines are hidden and the limit check is temporarily disabled.
  • Page 441 No fail beep can be generated if the ripple limit check is switched off. Note: The R&S ZNL/ZNLE does not have a built-in audio device and loudspeaker. To hear sounds, connect a USB audio device to the instrument or operate it via remote desktop.
  • Page 442 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Display Lines softtool Show Results All Traces Defines the visibility of ripple info fields in the active recall set. ● If disabled, only the ripple info field of the active trace is displayed (in case it has ripple check enabled).
  • Page 443 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Display Lines softtool The "Define Ripple Test" dialog contains a table to edit the individual ranges of the rip- ple check ranges. The buttons below the table extend, shorten, or reorder the range list and save/recall ripple test data.

  • Page 444: Circle Test Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Display Lines softtool range. Its ripple limit is estimated according to the measured ripple of the trace in the created range. The range numbers in the list are adapted. If no range is active, "Insert" is equivalent to "Add".
  • Page 445 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Display Lines softtool Show Limit Circle Shows or hides the limit line associated with the active trace in a polar diagram area. Note: Limit line display and limit check are independent of each other: Hiding the limit line does not switch off the limit check.
  • Page 446 No fail beep can be gen- erated if the limit check is switched off. Note: The R&S ZNL/ZNLE does not have a built-in audio device and loudspeaker. To hear sounds, connect a USB audio device to the instrument or operate it via remote desktop.

  • Page 447: Display Circle Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Display Lines softtool Clear Test Resets the limit check results. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CIRCle:CLEar Draw Circle Activates touchscreen or mouse operation; tap the diagram at one border of the limit circle and draw the circle to the required size and position.

  • Page 448: Horiz. Line Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Display Lines softtool Show Border If enabled, the border of the Display Circle is shown whenever the related trace is dis- played in complex format. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DCIRcle:DISPlay[:STATe] Limit to Circle On/Off If enabled, only trace points within the configured "Display Circle" are shown, when- ever the related trace is displayed in complex format.

  • Page 449: Marker Settings Softtool

    CALCulate<Chn>:DLINe:STATe Response Value Defines/shows the response value of the horizontal line. Tip: Use the R&S ZNL/ZNLE's drag and drop functionality to move the horizontal line to a particular position. The response value appears in the numeric entry field. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:DLINe...
  • Page 450 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Marker Settings softtool A first marker labeled "M1" is automatically created when the [Mkr] or [Mkr->] hardkey is pressed. The "Mkr 1" ... "Mkr 10" and "Ref Mkr" softkeys enable the corresponding markers. "Add Marker" adds a new marker.
  • Page 451 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Marker Settings softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>[:STATe] CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence[:STATe] All Off Disables all markers of the active trace. Markers remember their "Marker Props" while disabled (see Chapter 10.10.2, "Marker Props tab", on page 452). The marker properties are definitely lost when the associ- ated trace is deleted.

  • Page 452: Marker Props Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Marker Settings softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence[:STATe] CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:Y Add Marker Adds a new marker to the active trace. Uses the next "free" marker number Coupled Markers Activates or deactivates Marker coupling. The label indicates the selected...
  • Page 453 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Marker Settings softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:NAME CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:NAME Marker Format Defines the formatting of the active marker in the movable marker info field. For background information on marker formats, see "Marker format" on page 199.

  • Page 454: Set By Marker Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Marker Settings softtool Arbitrary: freezes the marker at the position determined by the current stimulus and response value. Tracking is disabled. The marker stores the stimulus value and – in addition – its X and Y coordinates in the current Marker Format.
  • Page 455 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Marker Settings softtool Center = Marker / Start = Marker / Stop = Marker / Span = Marker The following functions use the stimulus value of the active marker to define the sweep range.

  • Page 456: Info Field Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Marker Settings softtool ● "Min = Marker" sets the lower edge of the diagram equal to the response value of the active marker, leaving the values of the vertical divisions ("Scale / Div") unchanged.
  • Page 457 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Marker Settings softtool Coupled Markers Activates or deactivates Marker coupling. The label indicates the selected Coupling Type: "Coupling Type" Label "All" "Coupled Markers" "Channel" "Coupled Markers in <name of active channel>" "Diagram" "Coupled Markers in <name of active diagram>"...

  • Page 458: Marker Search Softtool

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Marker Search softtool 10.11 Marker Search softtool The "Marker Search" softtool provides functions for searching and tracking special points on traces. Access: [Mkr->] hardkey Background information Chapter 9.2.1, "Display elements of a VNA diagram", on page 194.
  • Page 459 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Marker Search softtool 10.11.1.1 Controls on the Peak tab Max / Min Sets the active marker to the absolute maximum or minimum in the search range, i.e. to the largest or smallest of all response values. If a complex trace format (e.g. a polar diagram) is active, the marker is set to the measurement point with the maximum or minimum magnitude.
  • Page 460 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Marker Search softtool Peak Left / Peak Right Sets the active marker to the next local maximum or minimum to the left or right of the current marker position, depending on the selected Peak Type.
  • Page 461 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Marker Search softtool 10.11.1.2 Search Range dialog The "Search Range" dialog confines the "Peak" and "Target Search" for the selected marker to a subrange of the sweep. The search range is a continuous interval of the sweep variable.
  • Page 462 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Marker Search softtool Note: The marker Evaluation Ranges are identical to the evaluation ranges for trace statistics. For more information, see Chapter 10.6.8.2, "Evaluation Range dialog", on page 381. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER[:RANGe] CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER[:RANGe] CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER:STARt CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER:STARt...
  • Page 463 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Marker Search softtool Select Marker Allows you to select the related marker and to activate or deactivate it. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>[:STATe] Search Config Allows you to select the Target Search Mode of the selected marker.

  • Page 464: Multiple Peak Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Marker Search softtool 10.11.2 Multiple Peak tab "Multiple Peak" search allows you to find multiple local minima/maxima at once. Background information Refer to "Basic marker search functions" on page 202. 10.11.2.1 Controls on the Multiple Peak tab...
  • Page 465 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Marker Search softtool Marker Config... Opens the Multiple Marker Config dialog. All Markers Off "All Off" on page 451. 10.11.2.2 Multiple Marker Config dialog The "Multiple Marker Config" dialog allows you to configure the multiple peak searches for the active trace.

  • Page 466: Target Search Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Marker Search softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer:MPEak:EXCursion CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer:MPEak:EXCursion:STATe 10.11.3 Target Search tab The "Target Search" functions use markers to locate trace points with a specific response value ("Target Value"). The functions are unavailable if the active trace con- tains no markers (e.g.
  • Page 467 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Marker Search softtool Target Format Description Formula "Lin Mag" Magnitude of z, unconverted. |z| = sqrt (x "dB Mag" Magnitude of z [dB] Mag(z) = 20 log|z| dB "Phase" Phase of z [°] φ (z) = arctan (y/x) "Phase unwrap"...

  • Page 468: Bandfilter Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Marker Search softtool Search Mode Displays and sets the current marker search mode. Select one of the predefined max, min, peak, or target searches or select "Sweep Pro- gress" to track the position of the sweep cursor.
  • Page 469 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Marker Search softtool Bandwidth Specifies the minimum excursion of the bandpass and bandstop peaks. ● A bandpass peak must fall off on both sides by the specified <Bandwidth> value to be considered a valid peak.
  • Page 470 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Marker Search softtool "Upper Edge" frequencies (see "Geometric Calculation of Bandfilter Center" on page 143). The search results are displayed in the movable "Bandfilter" info field. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:BWIDth:MODE BPASs CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:EXECute BFILter CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer:SEARch:BFILter:RESult[:STATe]:AREA Bandpass Ref to Mkr Activates the search for a bandpass region on the active trace and activates Tracking, starting at the position of the active marker.
  • Page 471 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Marker Search softtool "Upper Edge" positions (see "Geometric Calculation of Bandfilter Center" on page 143). The search results are displayed in the movable "Bandfilter" info field. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:BWIDth:MODE BSTop CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:EXECute BFILter Result Off Hides the movable info field with the results of a bandpass or a bandstop search and disables Tracking.

  • Page 472: Cal Softtool

    Cal softtool 10.12 Cal softtool The "Cal" softtool provides all functions related to system error calibration and scalar power calibration. The latter is available for R&S ZNL only. Access: [Cal] 10.12.1 Start Cal tab The "Start Cal" tab provides access to all functions for automatic or manual calibration.
  • Page 473 Opens the Power Cal wizard. If the active channel setup contains several channels, an "Info" box lets you decide whether the R&S ZNL/ZNLE acquires calibration data for the active channel or for all channels. Cal Validation ... Opens the Cal Validation dock widget...
  • Page 474 (along with its characterization). Step 2: Connections allows you to define the port assignments between the R&S ZNL/ZNLE and the calibration unit. Step 3: Cal Unit guides you through the required measurements on the standards provided by the calibration unit. Finally, you can either apply the resulting error terms to the related channels, or discard them.
  • Page 475 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Cal softtool Figure 10-13: Calibration Unit wizard, step 1: Ports Figure 10-14: Calibration Unit wizard, step 1: Ports (Inline Calibration System) Ports Selects the test ports to be calibrated. Note: Calibration and port de-/activation.
  • Page 476 Chapter 10.12.2.3, "Characterize Cal Unit dialog", on page 504. By default, the R&S ZNL/ZNLE uses the last generated cal unit characterization. Tip: If the characterization wizard is password-protected, the "Characterization" button is unavailable. Use this functionality to prevent inadvertent activation of inappropriate characterizations.
  • Page 477 The selected characterization data do not contain all standards needed for the selected calibration type. Step 2: Connections Defines the port assignments between the R&S ZNL/ZNLE and the calibration unit. Figure 10-15: Calibration Unit wizard, step 2: Connections User Manual 1178.5966.02 ─ 19...
  • Page 478 The test port connectors are automatically set according to the connector type of the selected calibration unit port. Detect Port Assignment Starts a procedure by which the R&S ZNL/ZNLE (with a little help from the attached calibration unit) auto-detects the connected ports. The automatic assignment replaces the configured one.
  • Page 479 R&S ZNL/ZNLE Cal softtool In the upper part of the "Cal Unit" screen, the R&S ZNL/ZNLE shows the calibration sweep diagrams for the currently measured S-parameter. The lower part visualizes the active port assignment and the measurement progress. Figure 10-16: Automatic calibration: inline calibration system...
  • Page 480 Performs the "Detect Port Assignment" and "Start Cal Sweep" functions, one after the other. Detect Port Assignment Starts a procedure by which the R&S ZNL/ZNLE (with a little help from the attached calibration unit) auto-detects the connected ports. The automatic assignment replaces the configured one.
  • Page 481 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Cal softtool SYSTem:COMMunicate:AKAL:CONNection SYSTem:COMMunicate:AKAL:MMEMory[:STATe] 10.12.1.4 Calibration Setting wizard The "Calibration Setting" wizard guides you through the setup and execution of a man- ual system error correction. Access: [Cal] > "Calibration" > Calibration – "Start... (Manual)"...
  • Page 482 ZNL/ZNLE Cal softtool Only a R&S ZNL with VNA board 1323.2967 and firmware version 1.35 or higher sup- ports manual UOSM calibration. For all other instruments "UOSM" is hidden. To find out which VNA board is installed on your instrument, look up the "FRONTEND VNA"...
  • Page 483 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Cal softtool ● The full n-port calibration types (n > 1, e.g. "TOSM") are symbolized by a closed square symbol. The number of arrows increases the complexity but can also improve the accuracy of the calibration.
  • Page 484 The assignment of a calibration kit to a connector type must be the same for all physi- cal ports: If a calibration kit is changed, the R&S ZNL/ZNLE automatically assigns the new kit to all ports with the same connector type.
  • Page 485 Allows you to acquire error correction data for every required port (pair) and calibration standard, where "required" depends on the selected ports and calibration type. On "Apply", the R&S ZNL/ZNLE calculates the system error correction (error terms) from the measurement data of the standards and applies the result to the active channel.
  • Page 486 Cal softtool Figure 10-18: Calibration Setting Wizard, Step 3: Calibration In the upper part of the "Calibration" screen, the R&S ZNL/ZNLE shows the sweep dia- grams for the currently measured S-parameter. The lower part displays the calibrated ports and standards and visualizes the measurement progress.
  • Page 487 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Cal softtool Use the buttons representing the calibration standards to start the corresponding cali- bration sweeps. If "Show Cal Kit Label" is enabled on the Calibration tab of the VNA Setup dialog, an additional "Calibration Info" dialog is displayed. In this case, the cal sweep is started from this dialog.
  • Page 488 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Cal softtool Incompatibilities between the selected calibration type, the standards and the channel settings can cause the calibration to be inaccurate. The analyzer auto-detects potential sources of errors and displays appropriate, self-explanatory notice boxes.
  • Page 489 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Cal softtool Calibration Sweep Diagram The calibration sweep diagram in the upper part of the screen shows the progress of the calibration and the accuracy of a completed calibration ("Verification"). The diagram is scaled in "dB Mag" format.
  • Page 490 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Cal softtool Apply Is enabled when a new set of power calibration data has been acquired. The button applies all available power calibrations to the active channel, aborts the verification sweeps, and closes the port overview section.
  • Page 491 SOURce<Ch>:POWer:CORRection[:ACQuire] SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] Calibrate Only Port Frequency Ignored. Not relevant for the R&S ZNL. Power Cal dialog – Meas. Receiver In "Meas. Receiver" mode, the "Power Cal" dialog guides you through the calibration of a measurement receiver. To ensure accurate source signal powers, a source power calibration must be performed before the measurement receiver calibration.
  • Page 492 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Cal softtool left: = source and meas. port identical right = source and meas. port different Port Overview The dialog shows all receiver ports of the network analyzer. The selected port is dis- played with the current cal power settings (see Chapter 10.12.3.2, "Cal Power Config...
  • Page 493 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Cal softtool left = "Ref. Receiver" Pwr Cal Method right = "Power Meter" Pwr Cal Method Start Cal Sweep Start the calibration sweeps for the selected port and power calibration settings and close the dialog. The calibration is performed as described in "Calibration procedure"...
  • Page 494 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Cal softtool Use "Detect Port Assignment" to detect the current port assignment (after reconnecting the calibration unit). Manual port assignment is not supported. Validate Runs the validation for the current port assignment. The validation proceeds through the connected ports cal unit ports p ∈...
  • Page 495 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Cal softtool Use "Detect Port Assignment" to detect the current port assignment (after reconnecting the calibration unit). Measurement Selects the measurement to be performed in advanced mode and runs it Characterization Selects the calibration unit characterization to be used for the validation.

  • Page 496: Cal Devices Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Cal softtool Unchecking "Auto Scale" prevents the traces from scaling as the measurement and/or standard changes. Unchecking "Average On" turns off averaging. "Format" selects the trace format for the limit check (see "Validation Limits"...
  • Page 497 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Cal softtool The list shows the available connector types with their name ("Conn. Type") and polar- ity ("Sexless"). The remaining columns in the list are described below. Storing connector type settings Calibration kits and connector types are global resources; the parameters are stored independently and available for all channel setups.
  • Page 498 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Cal softtool Line Type / Rel. Permittivity εr / Cutoff Freq. fc "Line Type" describes the wave propagation mode (offset model) in the transmission lines of the standards associated with the connector type. ●...
  • Page 499 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Cal softtool 10.12.2.2 Calibration Kits dialog The "Calibration Kits" dialog shows the available calibration kits for the different con- nector types. It is also used for cal kit and cal kit file management. Access: [Cal] > "Cal Kits..."...
  • Page 500 The buttons below the "Connector Type" list are used to store cal kit data to a file and to reload previously stored cal kit files. By default, calibration kit files are stored in the C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\ZNL\Calibration directory; Chapter 9.5.2.4, "Cal kit Files",...
  • Page 501 ".s1p File" and ".s2p File" define whether the characteristics of the standard are described by a Touchstone file rather than by a circuit model from which the R&S ZNL/ZNLE can calculate the S-parameters. See "Read .s1p File... / Read .s2p File...
  • Page 502 Read .s1p File... / Read .s2p File... / Opens a file selection dialog where you can select a Touchstone file containing the reflection or transmission S-parameters for the standard. The R&S ZNL/ZNLE uses the imported S-parameters rather than the circuit model to characterize the standard, if ".s1p File"/".s2p File"...
  • Page 503 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Cal softtool Related information Refer to the following sections: ● Chapter 9.5.2.4, "Cal kit Files", on page 260 ● "Kit Standards dialog" on page 500 ● Chapter 9.5.2.1, "Calibration standard types", on page 256...
  • Page 504 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Cal softtool Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:CKIT:<StandardType> Load Parameters The entries in the lower part of the "View / Modify Cal Kit Standards" dialog specify the load parameters for a particular calibration standard describing its terminal impedance.
  • Page 505 Controls in the Characterize Cal Unit dialog Calibration Unit Displays the connected calibration units. The R&S ZNL/ZNLE auto-detects all calibra- tion units which are connected to one of its USB ports. If several cal units are connec- ted, one of them must be selected for characterization (active cal unit).
  • Page 506 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Cal softtool The properties of the selected characterization are shown below the list. "Delete" dele- tes the selected characterization file; "Start Characterization..." opens the Characteri- zation wizard to create a characterization. Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:CKIT:CATalog?
  • Page 507 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Cal softtool Figure 10-20: Characterization of inline calibration units Test Port Assignment Defines the assignment between test ports and cal unit ports. In the default "Manual" assignment, VNA ports and cal unit port numbers match. If you decide to use a differ- ent assignment, you can auto-detect the actual assignment ("Automatic") or select the...
  • Page 508 "Take OSM" starts a calibration sweep for the related port. "Take All OSM and Through" initiates a series of calibration sweeps; the R&S ZNL/ZNLE acquires a full set of one-port and two-port data. The latter is required for the transmission normalizations and for a "One Path Two Ports"...

  • Page 509: Power Cal Settings Tab

    Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:CKIT 10.12.3 Power Cal Settings tab R&S ZNL only Gives access to all functions for power meter and power calibration data handling (transmission coefficients). Power calibration is a fully menu-guided process. Efficient power calibration procedure ●...
  • Page 510 10.12.3.1 Controls on the Power Cal Settings tab Some buttons serve as openers for additional dialogs: ● "Power Meters...": see Chapter 9.7.14, "Power sensor measurements (R&S ZNL only)", on page 306 ● "Power Meter Config...", see Chapter 10.12.3.5, "External Power Meter Config dia- log",...
  • Page 511 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Cal softtool Flatness Cal – Tolerance Defines the maximum deviation of the measured power from the cal power. The cali- bration procedure is stopped if "Max Iterations" is reached or if the measured power is within the "Tolerance".
  • Page 512 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Cal softtool Log Errors Enables the transfer of error messages for external devices to the error log C:\ProgramData\Rohde-Schwarz\ZNL-FPL\log\Error.log. Remote command: 10.12.3.2 Cal Power Config dialog The "Cal Power Config" dialog adjusts the target power for the power calibration (cal power) and defines the target power for the reference receiver calibration.
  • Page 513 SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:LEVel:OFFSet Reference Receiver Cal Power Defines the source power settings the R&S ZNL uses to perform the first calibration sweep of the source power calibration. In this first sweep, the power meter reading is used to calibrate the reference receiver of the calibrated port.
  • Page 514 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Cal softtool Note: Risk of damage due to high power settings. If an external device (e.g. an ampli- fier) is connected between the calibrated test port and the power meter, ensure that the "Reference Receiver Cal Power" does not exceed its maximum input power.
  • Page 515 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Cal softtool Remote command: SOURce:POWer:CORRection:TCOefficient[:STATe] Deprecated: SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:TCOefficient: CALibration Two Port Configuration dialog The "Two Port Configuration" dialog defines the transmission characteristics of an additional two-port in the calibrated frequency range. Access: Power Meter Transmission Coefficients dialog >...
  • Page 516 The "External Power Meters" dialog configures external power meters so that they can be used for measurements and power calibrations. Background information Refer to section Chapter 9.7.14, "Power sensor measurements (R&S ZNL only)", on page 306. The configuration of a new external power meter involves the following steps: 1.
  • Page 517 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Cal softtool 3. Select Scan Instruments and wait until the power meter appears in the table of "Known Devices". 4. Select to add the power meter to the list of Configured Devices. If your VNA fails to detect a connected power meter: ►...
  • Page 518 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Cal softtool ● – The device driver does not match exactly the device type. Probably the device cannot be controlled properly. Measurements results are questionable. Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer<Pmtr>:DEFine SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer:DELete SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer:CATalog? SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer:COUNt? Scan Instruments Performs an autodetection of "Known Devices" on the supported interfaces.
  • Page 519 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Cal softtool In the "Add External Power Meter" dialog, you can specify the instrument and connec- tion properties: ● "Interface" selects an interface/protocol type for the connection. In addition to the GPIB, VXI-11 and SOCKET interface types, the analyzer accepts any "Other" inter- face supported by the installed VISA library.

  • Page 520: Use Cal Tab

    Allows to modify configuration of certain external power meters, i.e. settings that are persistently stored on the power meter (and NOT on the R&S ZNL/ZNLE). This requires the respective device to be online, i.e. connected, switched on and ready to be used.
  • Page 521 Cal softtool 10.12.4.1 Controls on the Use Cal tab Figure 10-22: Use Cal tab: R&S ZNL (left) vs. R&S ZNLE (right) User Cal Active Activates or deactivates the system error correction in the active channel. "User Cal Active" is available only if a valid system error correction is available for the active channel;...
  • Page 522 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Cal softtool Manage Cals – Recall Last Cal Set Loads and activates the channel setup for which the last calibration was performed. If the last calibrated setup is already active, nothing is changed. The calibrated setups...
  • Page 523 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Cal softtool Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:STATe [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:POWer<PhyPt>[:STATe] [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:PCAL 10.12.4.3 Calibration Manager dialog The "Calibration Manager" dialog stores user correction data to the cal pool and assigns stored correction data to channels. Chapter 9.5.3, "Calibration pool", on page 262 for background information.
  • Page 524 Pool / Delete from Pool The "Pool" table shows all correction data sets <CalGroup_name>.cal in the direc- tory C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\ZNL\Calibration\Data. The name of a pool data set can be modified directly in the corresponding table cell. "Delete from Pool" deletes a cal group file from the pool. Note however, that calibra- tions being used in any of the opened channel setups cannot be deleted.

  • Page 525: Channel Softtool

    OUTPut<Ch>:UPORt[:VALue] mand and the output signals at pins 8 to 11 of the Aux. Port connector. The Aux. Port is optional for the R&S ZNL (requires R&S FPL1-B5). It is not available for the R&S ZNLE. Background information Refer to Chapter 9.1.3.3, "Active and inactive traces and...
  • Page 526 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Channel softtool The buttons in the "Channels" tab open the following dialogs: ● "Channel Manager...": see Chapter 10.13.1.2, "Channel Manager dialog", on page 528 Active Channel Selects an arbitrary channel of the active channel setup as the active channel. This function is disabled if the current channel setup contains only one channel.
  • Page 527 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Channel softtool CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:CHANnel:NAME? CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:CHANnel:NAME:ID? New Channel + Diagram Creates a channel and a trace with default settings, and assigns the created trace to a new diagram area. The new channel is named Ch<n>, where <n> is the largest of all existing channel numbers plus one.
  • Page 528 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Channel softtool When "Fixture Simulator" is deactivated: ● All balanced ports are resolved to single ended ports ● All port impedances are set to default ● All de/embeddings are disabled At the GUI, the "Balanced Ports" dialog and the de/embedding tabs and dock widgets are disabled.

  • Page 529: Mode Tab

    Optimizes the measurement process. 10.13.2.1 Controls on the Mode tab Figure 10-23: Channel > Mode tab (R&S ZNL vs. R&S ZNLE) The controls on the "Mode" tab are organized in sections "Driving Mode" and "Image Suppr." (R&S ZNL only). Driving Mode Determines the order of partial measurements and sweeps.
  • Page 530 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Channel softtool ● In "Chopped" mode, the analyzer completes the necessary sequence of partial measurements at each sweep point and obtains the result (measurement point) before proceeding to the next sweep point. A trace is obtained from the beginning of the sweep.

  • Page 531: Channel Bits Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Channel softtool LO > RF implies that LO = RF + IF. The mixer at port 2 converts both the wanted signal and the spurious signal b' which is at the frequency RF' = IF + LO, to the same IF frequency.

  • Page 532: Offset Embed Softtool

    Because the "Additional Interfaces" option is not available for the R&S ZNLE, the "Channel Bits" tab is always hidden on this instrument. ● If a R&S ZNL is equipped with theSpectrum analyzer function, the VNA Aux. Port functionality can only be used if the "Additional Interfaces" plugin-unit is set to the appropriate mode (see Chapter 7.4.6, "Additional...

  • Page 533: Offset Embed Dock Widget

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Offset Embed softtool Background information Refer to Chapter 9.6, "Offset parameters and de-/embedding", on page 277 10.14.1 Offset Embed dock widget On activating a tab in the "Offset Embed" softtool, a dock widget is displayed beneath the trace area, whose content pane is synchronized with the selected softtool tab.
  • Page 534 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Offset Embed softtool Figure 10-25: Offset Embed dock widget: Offset panel The "Offset" panel can also be activated by selecting the Offset tab One Way Loss tab. Refer to its description for additional functions and remote commands.
  • Page 535 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Offset Embed softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:LOSS<PhyPt>:OFFSet [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:LOSS<PhyPt> [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:LOSS<PhyPt>:FREQuency [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:LOSS<PhyPt>:SECond:STATe [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:LOSS<PhyPt>:SECond [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:LOSS<PhyPt>:SECond:FREQuency Reset Offsets The "Reset Offsets" button resets the length and loss parameters for all ports to their default values. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:OFFSet<PhyPt>[:STATe] All Offsets On / All Offsets Off Activates/deactivates the length and loss compensation for all ports.
  • Page 536 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Offset Embed softtool The "Single Ended" panel can also be activated by selecting the Single Ended tab soft- tool tab. Refer to its description for background information, parameters and additional remote commands. Active The checkbox in the "Active" column activates or deactivates the selected "Single Ended"...
  • Page 537 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Offset Embed softtool Move Up / Move Down Allows you to modify the sequence in which the active port set deembeddings/embed- dings are applied. Add / Delete Allows you to define the "Port Sets" to whom a deembedding or embedding network can be assigned.
  • Page 538 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Offset Embed softtool When loading a touchstone file, the analyzer by default assumes odd ports left (VNA side), even ports right (DUT side). However, it is also possible to instruct the analyzer to assume an "Increasing Port Sequence", i.e. that the low port numbers are on the VNA side.
  • Page 539 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Offset Embed softtool Active The checkboxes in the "Active" column activate or deactivate the configured de-/ embeding for the related balanced port (i.e. adds or removes it to/from the calculation flow) without changing its parameters.
  • Page 540 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Offset Embed softtool This panel can also be activated by selecting the Ground Loop tab softtool tab. Refer to its description for background information, parameters and additional remote com- mands. Active The checkboxes in the "Active" column activate or deactivate the configured ground loop deembedding/embedding (i.e.
  • Page 541 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Offset Embed softtool Active The "Active" flags are inversely related to the Use Default flags of the logical port con- figuration (see Balanced Ports dialog). "Active" "Use Default" ☑ ☐ ☐ ☑ 10.14.1.8 Differential Match panel This panel allows you to activate or deactivate differential match embedding.

  • Page 542: Offset Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Offset Embed softtool Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:DIFFerential:EMBedding<LogPt> 10.14.2 Offset tab Defines length offset parameters for each port. Use the complementary dock widget to activate or deactivate length/loss compensation for selected ports (see Chapter 10.14.1.2, "Offset panel",...
  • Page 543 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Offset Embed softtool Overview This button is available on all "Offset Embed" softtool tabs. It opens the Overview panel in the Offset Embed dock widget. Port Physical test port of the analyzer. You can define independent offset parameters for all ports.
  • Page 544 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Offset Embed softtool left = no delay right = delay 1 ns The position of the time gate is always relative to the end of the offset transmission line. As a consequence, "Adjust Time Gate" allows measurements at variable offset but fixed time gate position.
  • Page 545 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Offset Embed softtool If "Delay" is the selected trace format, the entire trace is shifted in vertical direction and centered on zero. In phase format, the "Auto Length" corrected trace shows the devia- tion from linear phase.
  • Page 546 282. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect:FIXTure:LMParameter[:STATe] [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:OFFSet<PhyPt>:DFComp[:STATe]? Prompt for Each Port Determines how the R&S ZNL/ZNLE performs the sweeps for a given termination type (Open and/or Short; see "Measurement Type" on page 546). ● If unchecked, it performs the sweeps for Open/Short without interruption, implicitly assuming that all ports are terminated accordingly ●...
  • Page 547 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Offset Embed softtool With Prompt for Each Port disabled, "Take" acquires data for all selected ports in one go. Otherwise sweeps are taken port by port. For "Direct Compensation", it is also possible to save the acquired data to file. In future measurements, you can load these files instead of repeating the data acquisition.

  • Page 548: One Way Loss Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Offset Embed softtool [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:FIXTure:EXPort [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:FIXTure:IMPort 10.14.3 One Way Loss tab Defines loss parameters for each physical port. Use the complementary dock widget to activate or deactivate length/loss compensation for selected ports (see Chapter 10.14.1.2, "Offset panel",...

  • Page 549: Single Ended Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Offset Embed softtool Auto Length and Loss Determines the length offset and one-way loss parameters for the receive port of the active trace. See Chapter 9.6.1.4, "Auto Length and Loss", on page 280. Evaluation Range...
  • Page 550 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Offset Embed softtool If the "Fixture Simulator" is disabled for the related channel (see "Fixture Simulator" on page 527), this tab is inactive, i.e. all controls except the "Overview" button are grayed out. Overview "Overview"...
  • Page 551 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Offset Embed softtool Network The graphical list contains all available 2-port networks: ● symbol selects "no network" and disables single-ended de-/embedding. ● The "2-Port Data" network is defined by means of imported S-parameter data; see Select File...

  • Page 552: Port Sets Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Offset Embed softtool Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:SENDed:DEEMbedding<PhyPt> MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt> 10.14.5 Port Sets tab Selects transformation networks for deembedding/embedding arbitrary port sets, defines their parameters, assigns them to a port set and enables embedding. Use the complementary dock widget to create the required port sets and to activate or deactivate dembedding/embedding for selected port sets (see Chapter 10.14.1.4, "Port...
  • Page 553 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Offset Embed softtool Port Set Port sets, defined in the complementary Port Sets panel dock widget panel. The trans- formation networks are defined such that the physical analyzer test ports are connec- ted to the left of the circuit; the DUT ports are on the right side. You can define inde- pendent transformation networks for all port sets.

  • Page 554: Balanced Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Offset Embed softtool CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>: PARameters:C<1|2|3> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>: PARameters:L<1|2|3> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>: PARameters:R<1|2|3> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>: PARameters:G<1|2|3> D1, D2 The "D1" (and "D2") buttons are enabled as long as the selected deembedding/embed- ding network is defined using Touchstone files. When loading a touchstone file, the analyzer by default assumes odd ports left (VNA side), even ports right (DUT side).
  • Page 555 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Offset Embed softtool If the "Fixture Simulator" is disabled for the related channel (see "Fixture Simulator" on page 527), this tab is inactive, i.e. all controls except the "Overview" button are grayed out. Overview "Overview"...
  • Page 556 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Offset Embed softtool symbol selects "no network" and disables deembedding/embedding for the selected balanced port. Other 2-port data-subnetworks (symbols "D1" and "D2") are defined by means of s2p files (see Network). The parameters of lumped elements are displayed below the graphical list.

  • Page 557: Ground Loop Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Offset Embed softtool Note: The loaded file is stored in the active channel setup. Persisted channel setups contain the full (de-)embedding data so that they can be transferred to other instru- ments. Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:BALanced:DEEMbedding<LogPt>...
  • Page 558 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Offset Embed softtool If the "Fixture Simulator" is disabled for the related channel (see "Fixture Simulator" on page 527), this tab is inactive, i.e. all controls except the "Overview" button are grayed out. Overview "Overview"...

  • Page 559: Differential Match Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Offset Embed softtool Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:GLOop:DEEMbedding MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:GLOop:EMBedding Set to Ideal Ground This function is enabled as long as the 1-Port Data network is active. An imported S- parameter set is replaced by the S-parameters of an ideal through connection, which eliminates the transformation network.
  • Page 560 ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Offset Embed softtool Overview "Overview" on page 543. Type Currently only Differential Match"Embedding" is supported. Logical Port Logical analyzer port, as defined in the "Balanced Ports" configuration. The transfor- mation networks are defined such that the physical analyzer test ports are connected to the left of the circuit;...

  • Page 561: Config Tab

    ® VNA GUI reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Offset Embed softtool 10.14.9 Config tab The "Config" tab provides means to configure the overall "Offset Embed" calculation. Offset > Calculate after De-/Embed. Changes the position of the "Offset" calculation in the "Offset Embed" calculation chain.

  • Page 562: Command Reference

    The commands required to perform measurements in the VNA and Spectrum applica- tions in a remote environment are described here. It is assumed that the R&S ZNL/ZNLE has already been set up for remote operation in a network as described in Chapter 8.5, "How to set up a network and remote...

  • Page 563: Common Commands

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common commands 11.2 Common commands Common commands are described in the IEEE 488.2 (IEC 625-2) standard. These commands have the same effect and are employed in the same way on different devi- ces. The headers of these commands consist of "*" followed by three letters. Many common commands are related to the Status Reporting System.

  • Page 564: Esr

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common commands *ESR? Event status read Returns the contents of the event status register in decimal form and then sets the reg- ister to zero. Return values: <Contents> Range: 0 to 255 Usage: Query only...

  • Page 565: Pcb

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common commands Return values: <Options> The query returns a list of options. The options are returned at fixed positions in a comma-separated string. A zero is returned for options that are not installed. Usage: Query only *PCB <Address>...

  • Page 566: Sre

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common commands Usage: Setting only *SRE <Contents> Service request enable Sets the service request enable register to the indicated value. This command deter- mines under which conditions a service request is triggered. Parameters: <Contents> Contents of the service request enable register in decimal form.

  • Page 567: Common Instrument Commands

    Managing settings and results................575 ● Configuring the R&S ZNL/ZNLE................602 11.3.1 Commands for remote instrument operation The following commands are required to shutdown or reboot the R&S ZNL/ZNLE from a remote PC......................567 SYSTem:CLOGging ......................567 SYSTem:REBoot ...................... 568 SYSTem:SHUTdown SYSTem:CLOGging <State>...

  • Page 568: Selecting The Operating Mode And Application

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands SYSTem:SHUTdown This command shuts down the instrument. 11.3.2 Selecting the operating mode and application The following commands are required to select the operating mode or the application and to configure a Sequencer in a remote environment.
  • Page 569 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands INSTrument:CREate[:NEW] <ChannelType>, <ChannelName> This command adds a measurement channel. You can configure up to 10 measure- ment channels at the same time (depending on available memory). See also ● on page 571 INSTrument[:SELect] ●...
  • Page 570 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands Setting parameters: <ChannelName> String containing the name of the channel setup you want to delete. A channel setup must exist to delete it. Usage: Setting only Manual operation: "Closing a channel setup"...
  • Page 571 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands <ChannelName2> String containing the new channel setup name. Note that you cannot assign an existing channel setup name to a new channel setup. If you do, an error occurs. Channel names can have a maximum of 31 characters, and must be compatible with the Windows conventions for file names.
  • Page 572 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands INITiate:SEQuencer:IMMediate This command starts a new sequence of measurements by the Sequencer. Before this command can be executed, the Sequencer must be activated (see on page 572). SYSTem:SEQuencer Example: SYST:SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer.
  • Page 573 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands ON | 1 The Sequencer is activated and a sequential measurement is started immediately. OFF | 0 The Sequencer is deactivated. Any running sequential measure- ments are stopped. Further Sequencer commands (INIT:SEQ...) are not available.
  • Page 574 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands //----------Creating a second measurement channel ---------------- //Create second IQ channel INSTrument:CREate:NEW IQ,'IQ 2' //Set sweep count SENS:SWEEP:COUNT 2 //Change trace modes DISP:TRAC1:MODE MAXH DISP:TRAC2:MODE MINH //Create new analyzer channel INSTrument:CREate:NEW SANalyzer,'Spectrum 2'...

  • Page 575: Managing Settings And Results

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands //Set marker to maximum in IQ1 and query result CALCulate:MARKer:MAXimum CALC:MARK:Y? //Switch to second IQ channel and retrieve results INST:SEL 'IQ 2';*WAI CALCulate:MARKer:MIN CALC:MARK:Y? //Switch to first Spectrum channel INST:SEL 'Spectrum';*WAI //Query one of the SEM results...
  • Page 576 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands ● Storing or printing screenshots................589 ● Storing measurement results................598 ● Examples: managing data..................598 11.3.3.1 General data storage and loading commands The following commands are available for all applications..................576 FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator ......................576...
  • Page 577 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands If you leave out the path, the command returns the contents of the directory selected with MMEMory:CDIRectory on page 577. The path may be relative or absolute. Using wildcards ('*') is possible to query a certain type of files only.
  • Page 578 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands Example: MMEMory:COMMent "ACP measurement with Standard Tetra from 23.05." MMEMory::MMEMory:STORe1:STATe 1, "ACP_T" As a result, in the selection list for recall settings, the comment "ACP measurement with Standard Tetra from 23.05." is added to the ACP entry.
  • Page 579 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands Example: MMEM:NAME '\Public\User\Testfile.txt' Creates a new file called 'testfile.txt'. MMEM:DATA 'Testfile.txt',#220Contents of the file The parameter means: #2: hash sign and length of the length information (20 bytes = 2 digits) 20: indicates the number of subsequent binary data bytes.
  • Page 580 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands MMEMory:NAME <FileName> This command has several purposes, depending on the context it is used in. ● It creates a new and empty file. ● It defines the file name for screenshots taken with HCOPy[:IMMediate]. Note that you have to route the printer output to a file.
  • Page 581 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands OFF | 0 Does not reconnect at logon. MMEMory:NETWork:UNUSeddrives This command returns a list of unused network drives. MMEMory:NETWork:USEDdrives [<State>] This command returns a list of all network drives in use. Parameters: <State>...
  • Page 582 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands ............583 MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:SPECtrogram ..............583 MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:SGRam ................584 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:SPECtrogram ................... 584 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:SGRam ............584 MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:TRACe[:ACTive] ............. 584 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe<1...3>[:ACTive] ............584 MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL ..............584 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:ALL MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:ALL This command includes all items when storing or loading a configuration file.
  • Page 583 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands Parameters: <State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1 *RST: Example: MMEM:SEL:HWS ON MMEMory:SELect:CHANnel[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL <State> MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL <State> This command includes or excludes all limit lines (active and inactive) when storing or loading a configuration file.
  • Page 584 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:SPECtrogram <State> MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:SGRam <State> This command includes or excludes spectrogram data when storing or loading a con- figuration file. Parameters: <State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0 *RST: Example: MMEM:SEL:SGR ON Adds the spectrogram data to the list of data subsets.
  • Page 585 MMEM:CLE:STAT 1,'TEST' MMEMory:LOAD:AUTO <1>, <FileName> This command restores an instrument configuration and defines that configuration as the default state. The default state is restored after a preset (*RST) or after you turn on the R&S ZNL/ ZNLE. Parameters: <1> <FileName>...
  • Page 586 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM] commands (remote operation; the settings are identical in both cases). The selection only applies to Spectrum setups, see the R&S ZNL/ZNLE Spectrum Mode User Manual. A VNA setup is always loaded in its entirety. By default, the selection is limited to the user settings ("User Settings" selection in the dialogs, HWSettings in SCPI).
  • Page 587 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands MMEMory:LOAD:TYPE <Type> This command defines whether the channel setups that will be loaded with the subse- quent MMEM:LOAD:STAT command will replace the current channel setup or activate a new channel setup. Parameters: <Type>...
  • Page 588 Example: INST:SEL 'SPECTRUM2' Selects channel setup'SPECTRUM2'. MMEM:STOR:TYPE CHAN Specifies that channel setup data is to be stored. SYSTem:PRESet This command presets the R&S ZNL/ZNLE. It is identical to *RST. Example: SYST:PRES Usage: Event SYSTem:PRESet:CHANnel[:EXEC] This command restores the default instrument settings in the current channel setup.

  • Page 589: Display:logo

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands Example: INST:SEL 'Spectrum2' Selects the channel setup for "Spectrum2". SYST:PRES:CHAN:EXEC Restores the factory default settings to the "Spectrum2"channel setup. Usage: Event 11.3.3.4 Storing or printing screenshots Useful commands to configure screenshots described elsewhere ●...

  • Page 590: Hcopy:abort

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands 1 | ON Logo is printed. 0 | OFF Logo is not printed. *RST: Example: DISP:LOGO OFF Manual operation: "Print Logo" on page 107 HCOPy:ABORt This command aborts a running hardcopy output.

  • Page 591: Hcopy:cmap:Default

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands Example: HCOP:DEST1 'SYST:COMM:CLIP' HCOP:CONT WIND HCOP:DEST1? //Result: 'MMEM' HCOP:DEV:LANG1? //Result: 'PDF' "Print to clipboard" is automatically switched to "print to PDF file" when the contents are switched to "multiple windows". Manual operation: "Print Screenshot"...

  • Page 592: Hcopy:device:color

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands 'MMEM' Activates "Print to file". Thus, if the destination of the print func- tion is set to "printer" (see HCOP:DEST1 'SYSTem:COMMuni GDI), the output is redir- cate:PRINter' HCOP:DEV:LANG ected to a .PRN file using the selected printer driver.

  • Page 593: Hcopy:device:language

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands Example: HCOP:DEV:COL ON HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage <Language> This command selects the file format for a print job or to store a screenshot to a file. Parameters: <Language> BMP, JPG, PNG Data format for output to files only.

  • Page 594: Hcopy:page:count:state

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands HCOPy:PAGE:COUNt:STATe <State> This command includes or excludes the page number for printouts consisting of multi- ple pages (HCOPy:CONTent on page 590). Parameters: <State> 1 | 0 | ON | OFF 1 | ON The page number is printed.

  • Page 595: Hcopy:page:margin:top

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands Manual operation: "Margins" on page 114 HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin:TOP <Top> This command defines the margin at the top of the printout page on which no elements are printed. The margins are defined according to HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin:UNIT on page 595.

  • Page 596: Hcopy:page:window:count

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands Parameters: <Channel> String containing the name of the channel setup. For a list of available channel setup types use INSTrument: on page 570. LIST? <State> 1 | 0 | ON | OFF 1 | ON The channel setup windows are included in the printout.

  • Page 597: Hcopy:page:window:state

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands Example: HCOP:PAGE:WIND2:SCAL 0 Manual operation: "Scaling" on page 114 HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow:STATe <Channel>, <Window>, <State> This command selects the windows to be included in the printout for HCOPy:CONTent on page 590. Parameters: <Channel> String containing the name of the channel setup.

  • Page 598: System:communicate:printer:enumerate[:Next]

    597 SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate:FIRSt for this command to work properly. Manual operation: "Printer Name" on page 112 SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:SELect<di> <Printer> This command selects the printer that processes jobs sent by the R&S ZNL/ZNLE. to select another output destination. HCOPy:DESTination<di> Suffix: <di> 1..n Irrelevant.
  • Page 599 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands MMEM:NETW:USED? //Returns a list of all drives in use in the network. MMEM:NETW:UNUS? //Returns a list of free drive names in the network. MMEM:NETW:MAP 'Q:','Server\ACLRTest' //Maps drive Q: to the directory 'Server\ACLRTest'...
  • Page 600 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands Storing instrument settings In this example we will store the instrument settings for the "Spectrum" channel setup. INST:SEL 'SPECTRUM' //Selects measurement channel 'SPECTRUM'. MEMM:STOR:TYPE CHAN //Specifies that channel-specific data is to be stored.
  • Page 601 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands //Means that one printer is available. SYST:COMM:PRIN:SEL2 'LASER on LPT1' //Selects the printer for the print job on device 2. HCOP:PAGE:ORI2 LAND //Selects the landscape format for the printout. HCOP:TDST:STAT2 ON //Includes date and time on the printout.

  • Page 602: Configuring The R&S Znl/Znle

    Configuring the reference frequency ..................602 [SENSe:]ROSCillator:SOURce [SENSe:]ROSCillator:SOURce <Source> This command selects the reference oscillator. If you want to select the external reference, it must be connected to the R&S ZNL/ ZNLE. Parameters: <Source> INTernal The internal reference is used (10 MHz).

  • Page 603: Calibration[:All]

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands ....................603 CALibration:DUE:DAYS .................... 604 CALibration:DUE:SCHedule ..................605 CALibration:DUE:SHUTdown ....................605 CALibration:DUE:TIME ..................... 605 CALibration:DUE:WARMup .......................606 CALibration:RESult? ............606 DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:PULSed:CFRequency ............606 DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:PULSed:MCFRequency ................606 DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] ................607 DIAGnostic:SERVice:STESt:RESult? ................607 SOURce<si>:TEMPerature:FRONtend CALibration[:ALL]? This command initiates a calibration (self-alignment) routine and queries if calibration was successful.
  • Page 604 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands <Day2> ALL | MONDay | TUESday | WEDNesday | THURsday | FRIDay | SATurday | SUNDay <Day3> ALL | MONDay | TUESday | WEDNesday | THURsday | FRIDay | SATurday | SUNDay <Day4>...
  • Page 605 R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands CALibration:DUE:SHUTdown <State> If activated, the R&S ZNL/ZNLE is automatically shut down after self-alignment is com- pleted. Note that the instrument cannot be restarted via remote control. Parameters: <State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1...
  • Page 606 (DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] on page 606). DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] <Signal> This command activates or deactivates the use of an internal calibration signal as input for the R&S ZNL/ZNLE. Parameters: <Signal> CALibration Uses the calibration signal as RF input.

  • Page 607: Customizing The Screen Layout

    Temperature in degrees Celsius. Example: SOUR:TEMP:FRON? Queries the temperature of the frontend sensor. 11.3.4.3 Customizing the screen layout The remote commands required to set up the display of the R&S ZNL/ZNLE are descri- bed here. ● General display settings and items............... 608 ●...
  • Page 608 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands General display settings and items The following commands add, remove or customize general display and screen ele- ments. Remote commands exclusive to general display settings ..................... 608 DISPlay:ANNotation:CBAR ......................608 DISPlay:BLIGhting ..................608 DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency ....................609...
  • Page 609 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands Example: DISP:ANN:FREQ OFF Manual operation: "Diagram Footer (Annotation)" on page 122 DISPlay:SBAR[:STATe] <State> This command turns the status bar on and off. Parameters: <State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1 *RST:...
  • Page 610 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands FRAMe Touch screen is inactivate for the diagram area of the screen, but active for softkeys, toolbars and menus. *RST: Example: DISP:TOUC:STAT ON Manual operation: "Deactivating and Activating the Touchscreen" on page 120 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TIME <State>...
  • Page 611 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands SYSTem:DISPlay:FPANel[:STATe] <State> This command includes or excludes the front panel keys when working with the remote desktop. Parameters: <State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1 *RST: Manual operation: "Front Panel" on page 123 SYSTem:DATE <Year>, <Month>, <Day>...

  • Page 612: Remote Commands For Language Settings

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands DISPlay:CMAP<it>:DEFault<ci> This command selects the color scheme for the display. The query returns the default color scheme. Suffix: <it> Irrelevant. <ci> Default color set 1 with a black background and white grid.

  • Page 613: Configuring The Network And Remote Control

    ....................617 SYSTem:LXI:LANReset ..................... 617 SYSTem:LXI:MDEScription ....................617 SYSTem:LXI:PASSword .................... 617 SYSTem:REVision:FACTory SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess <Address> This command sets the GPIB address of the R&S ZNL/ZNLE. Parameters: <Address> Range: 0 to 30 *RST: (no influence on this parameter, factory default 20) Example: SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR 18 Manual operation: "GPIB Address"...
  • Page 614 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:RTERminator <Terminator> This command selects the GPIB receive terminator. Output of binary data from the instrument to the control computer does not require such a terminator change. Parameters: <Terminator> LFEOI | EOI LFEOI According to the standard, the terminator in ASCII is <LF>...
  • Page 615 This command switches the error display during remote operation on and off. If activated, the R&S ZNL/ZNLE displays a message box at the bottom of the screen that contains the most recent type of error and the command that caused the error.
  • Page 616 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands SYSTem:IDENtify[:STRing] <String> This command defines the response to *IDN?. Parameters: <String> String containing the description of the instrument. Manual operation: "Identification String" on page 157 SYSTem:KLOCk <State> This command locks or unlocks manual operation.

  • Page 617: Checking The System Configuration

    Resets the response to the REV? query to the factory default value. Usage: Event 11.3.4.6 Checking the system configuration The following commands are required to check the system configuration on the R&S ZNL/ZNLE. Useful commands for obtaining system information described elsewhere: ● on page 622 DIAGnostic:SERVice:SINFo? User Manual 1178.5966.02 ─ 19...
  • Page 618 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands Remote commands exclusive to obtaining system information: ................618 DIAGnostic:SERVice:BATTery:LEVel? ..................618 DIAGnostic:SERVice:BIOSinfo? ..................618 DIAGnostic:SERVice:HWINfo? ..................619 DIAGnostic:SERVice:VERSinfo? .................... 619 SYSTem:ERRor:CLEar:ALL ..................619 SYSTem:ERRor:CLEar:REMote ....................619 SYSTem:ERRor:LIST? ....................620 SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]? ....................620 SYSTem:FIRMware:UPDate ....................620 SYSTem:FORMat:IDENt ..................621...
  • Page 619 This command deletes all contents of the "System Messages" table. Example: SYST:ERR:CLE:ALL SYSTem:ERRor:CLEar:REMote This command deletes all contents of the "Remote Errors" table. Note: The remote error list is automatically cleared when the R&S ZNL/ZNLE is shut down. Example: SYST:ERR:CLE:REM Manual operation: "Display Remote Errors"...
  • Page 620 REMote Queries the error messages that occurred during remote opera- tion. Note: The remote error list is automatically cleared when the R&S ZNL/ZNLE is shut down. Return values: <SystemMessages> String containing all messages in the "System Messages" table. <RemoteErrors> <Error_no> | <Description> | <Command> | <Date> | <Time>...

  • Page 621: Using Service Functions

    R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands SYSTem:PRESet:COMPatible <OpMode> This command defines the operating mode that is activated when you switch on the R&S ZNL/ZNLE or press the [PRESET] key. Parameters: <OpMode> Defines the Vector Network Analysis mode as the presetting (default).
  • Page 622 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE Common instrument commands DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction:LASTresult? This command queries the results of the most recent service function you have used. Return values: <Result> Usage: Query only DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction:RESults:DELete This command deletes the results in the output buffer for service functions you have used.

  • Page 623: Programming Examples For Instrument Setup

    ® R&S ZNL/ZNLE Command reference Common instrument commands <CurrentDate>: The date on which the file is created (<YYYYMMDD>) <CurrentTime>: The time at which the file is created (<HHMMSS>) Example: DIAG:SERV:SINF? Result: "C: \ProgramData\Rohde-Schwarz\ZNL\user\ZNL3-123456_20160803_14 Usage: Query only Manual operation: " Create R&S Support Information "...

  • Page 624: Vna Remote Control Basics

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA remote control basics SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:EXECute 'External','MyEditor' //************************************************************************************* //Configure the default IECWIN application to execute a predefined script. //Add the IECWIN application to the "External" tab of the application starter manually //via the graphical user interface of the instrument...
  • Page 625 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA remote control basics 11.4.2.1 Traces, channels, and diagram areas Like in manual control, traces can be assigned to a channel and displayed in diagram areas (see section Traces, Channels and Diagram Areas in Chapter 3). There are two main differences between manual and remote control: ●...
  • Page 626 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA remote control basics The active traces are handled as follows: ● After a preset (*RST), the analyzer displays a single diagram area with the default trace no. 1 named Trc1. The trace is active in manual and in remote control.
  • Page 627 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA remote control basics can help to optimize a remote control program (see also programming example in Chapter 11.6.1.1, "Typical stages of a remote control program", on page 1050): ● Switch off the measurement while configuring your instrument.

  • Page 628: The Iecwin Tool

    'ABCD'; the trace suffix is ignored) 11.4.3 The IECWIN tool The R&S ZNL/ZNLE is delivered with IECWIN installed, an auxiliary tool provided free of charge by R&S. IECWIN is a program to send SCPI commands to a measuring instrument either interactively or from a command script.

  • Page 629: Status Reporting System

    IECWIN tool is installed on to the R&S ZNL/ZNLE you want to control. If you are using the tool directly on the R&S ZNL/ZNLE, you can use an NT Pipe (COM Parser) connection, which requires no further configuration. For help on setting up other connection types, check the tool's online help (by clicking the "Help"...
  • Page 630 STB is structured according to SCPI. By analogy, the ESE can be used as the ENABle part of the ESR. 11.4.4.1 Overview of status registers The status registers of the R&S ZNL/ZNLE are implemented as shown below. User Manual 1178.5966.02 ─ 19...
  • Page 631 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA remote control basics not used not used not used -&- -&- -&- not used not used Limit trace no. 14 -&- -&- -&- not used not used Limit trace no. 13 -&- -&- -&- not used Limit trace no.
  • Page 632 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA remote control basics The sum bit is obtained from the EVENt and ENABle part for each register. The result is then entered into a bit of the CONDition part of the higher-order register. The instrument automatically generates the sum bit for each register. Thus an event...
  • Page 633 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA remote control basics NTRansition The Negative TRansition part also acts as a transition filter. When a bit of the CONDi- tion part is changed from 1 to 0, the associated NTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1.
  • Page 634 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA remote control basics ● The STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<1|2> register indicates the result of the limit check. ● The STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity register monitors hardware failures of the analyzer. STB and SRE The STatus Byte (STB) provides a rough overview of the instrument status by collect- ing the pieces of information of the lower registers.
  • Page 635 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA remote control basics Related common commands The STB is read out using the command *STB? or a Serial poll. The SRE can be set using command *SRE and read using *SRE? . IST flag and PPE...
  • Page 636 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA remote control basics Bit No. Meaning Command error This bit is set if a command which is undefined or syntactically incorrect is received. An error message with a number between -100 and -200, which describes the error in greater detail, is entered into the error queue.
  • Page 637 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA remote control basics Bit No. Meaning LIMit2 register summary This bit is set if a bit is set in the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit2 register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1. Failed limit check for trace no. 1 This bit is set if any point on trace no.
  • Page 638 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA remote control basics Bit No. Meaning HARDware register summary This bit is set if a bit is set in the STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:HARDware register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1. STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:HARDware The STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:HARDware register can be queried using...
  • Page 639 Query of a specific instrument status by commands ● Query of the error queue Service request The R&S ZNL/ZNLE can send a service request (SRQ) to the controller. Usually this service request causes an interrupt, to which the control program can react appropri- ately. Initiating an SRQ...
  • Page 640 STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit1 register) 3. Set bit 1 in the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit1:ENABle register The R&S ZNL/ZNLE generates an SRQ when the event associated with bit 1 of the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit1:ENABle register occurs, i.e. when any point on the first trace fails the limit check.
  • Page 641 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA remote control basics Serial poll In a serial poll, the controller queries the STatus Bytes of the devices in the bus system one after another. The query is made via interface messages, so it is faster than a poll using *STB?.
  • Page 642 11.4.4.5 Reset values of the status reporting system The table below indicates the effects of various commands upon the status reporting system of the R&S ZNL/ZNLE. DCL, SDC (Device Clear, Selected Device Clear) Event Switching on DCL, SDC...

  • Page 643: Vna Command Reference

    Chapter 11.5.3, "R&S ZVR/ZVABT compatible commands", on page 1026. If you want to make full use of the R&S ZNL/ZNLE features but do not need R&S ZVR compatibility, you should use the commands listed in Chapter 11.5.2, "SCPI command reference", on page 645.
  • Page 644 Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference form or the long form; mixed forms are not always recognized. The R&S ZNL/ZNLE itself does not distinguish upper case and lower case characters. 11.5.1.2 Special characters The following special characters are frequencly used in the command description: ●...

  • Page 645: Scpi Command Reference

    (it denotes the active trace in the channel). 11.5.2 SCPI command reference The following sections provide detailed reference information on the instrument con- trol commands implemented by the R&S ZNL/ZNLE network analyzer. ● CALCulate commands..................645 ●...
  • Page 646 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CALCulate:CALValidate... Commands related to Calibration validation................ 646 CALCulate:CALValidate:AVERage[:STATe] ................646 CALCulate:CALValidate:CHARacteriza ..................646 CALCulate:CALValidate:FORMat ............647 CALCulate:CALValidate:RESPonse:IMAGinary:LOWer ............647 CALCulate:CALValidate:RESPonse:IMAGinary:UPPer ............. 647 CALCulate:CALValidate:RESPonse:REAL:LOWer ..............647 CALCulate:CALValidate:RESPonse:REAL:UPPer .............647 CALCulate:CALValidate:RESPonse:MAGNitude:LOWer ............. 647 CALCulate:CALValidate:RESPonse:MAGNitude:UPPer ............647 CALCulate:CALValidate:RESPonse:PHASe:LOWer ............647 CALCulate:CALValidate:RESPonse:PHASe:UPPer ..............
  • Page 647 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Manual operation: "Preferences" on page 495 CALCulate:CALValidate:RESPonse:IMAGinary:LOWer <Port>, <Value> CALCulate:CALValidate:RESPonse:IMAGinary:UPPer <Port>, <Value> CALCulate:CALValidate:RESPonse:REAL:LOWer <Port>, <Value> CALCulate:CALValidate:RESPonse:REAL:UPPer <Port>, <Value> Defines the upper and lower cal validation limits for the REAL trace format (see CALCulate:CALValidate:FORMat).
  • Page 648 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CALCulate:CALValidate:RESPonse:PRESet Resets the cal validation limits (CALCulate:CALValidate:RESPonse:REAL|IMAGinary|MAGNitude|PHASe: LOWer|UPPer). Usage: Event Manual operation: "Validation Limits" on page 495 CALCulate:CALValidate:RUN Runs the cal validation with its configured settings. Usage: Event Manual operation: "Validate" on page 494...
  • Page 649 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference ....................654 CALCulate:DATA:DALL? ...............654 CALCulate<Ch>:DATA:MDATa:INTerpolate ...............655 CALCulate<Chn>:DATA:NSWeep:COUNt? ................. 655 CALCulate<Chn>:DATA:NSWeep:FIRSt? ............... 656 CALCulate<Chn>:DATA:NSWeep[:LAST]? ..................657 CALCulate<Ch>:DATA:SGRoup? ................. 657 CALCulate<Chn>:DATA:STIMulus? ....................657 CALCulate:DATA:TRACe CALCulate<Chn>:DATA <Format>, <Data>... CALCulate<Chn>:DATA? <Format> The query reads the response values of the selected channel's active trace or reads error terms of the selected channel.
  • Page 650 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: *RST; SWE:POIN 20 Create a trace with 20 sweep points, making the created trace the active trace of channel 1 (omitted optional mnemonic SENSe1). CALC:DATA? FDAT Query the 20 response values of the created trace. In the FDATa setting, 20 comma-separated ASCII values are returned.
  • Page 651 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference MDATa Unformatted trace data (see SDATa) after evaluation of trace mathematics. [Data access point 5] NCData Factory calibrated trace data: the values are obtained right after applying the fac- tory calibration but before applying a user-defined calibration (if any).
  • Page 652 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CALCulate:DATA:ALL? <Format>[, <ChannelSetup>] Reads the current response values of all traces of the referenced channel setup. Query parameters: <Format> FDATa | SDATa | MDATa Output format for the S-parameter data, see CALCulate<Chn>:DATA.
  • Page 653 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference SDATa Output as unformatted trace data; see CALCulate<Chn>:DATA . Query only. FSIData Output or input at "Fixture Simulation Input" data access point. <Data> Trace data either in ASCII or block data format, depending on the current setting.

  • Page 654: Calculate:data:dall

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CALCulate<Ch>:DATA:CHANnel:DALL? <Format> Reads the current response values of all data traces of the selected channel. Use to query data traces and memory traces. CALCulate<Ch>:DATA:CHANnel:ALL? Suffix: <Ch> Channel number Query parameters: <Format> FDATa | SDATa | MDATa Output format for the S-parameter data, see CALCulate<Chn>:DATA.

  • Page 655: Calculate:Data:nsweep:count

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CALCulate<Chn>:DATA:NSWeep:COUNt? Reads the number of completed sweeps in single sweep mode (INITiate<Ch>: OFF). The trace can be any of the traces acquired during the single CONTinuous sweep cycle. Tip: This command can only be used for >...

  • Page 656: Calculate:Data:nsweep[:Last]

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: SWE:COUN 10 Define the number of sweeps (10) to be measured in single sweep mode. INIT:CONT OFF; :INIT; Activate single sweep mode and start a single sweep sequence in channel no. 1. No synchronization is necessary.

  • Page 657: Calculate:Data:sgroup

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: SWE:COUN 10 Define the number of sweeps (10) to be measured in single sweep mode. INIT:CONT OFF; :INIT; *OPC? Activate single sweep mode and start a single sweep sequence in channel no. 1. Wait until the single sweep sequence is com- plete.
  • Page 658 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference ● Formatted trace data (FDATa) can only be imported to "live" traces if the related channel is in single sweep mode (INITiate<Ch>:CONTinuous OFF). Before the import, the target trace must be prepared according to the settings used during export.
  • Page 659 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: *RST; :CALCulate1:TRANsform:TIME:STATe ON CALCulate1:FILTer:GATE:TIME:STATe ON; SHOW ON Activate time domain representation and a time gate in channel no. 1. Display the time gate CALCulate1:FILTer:GATE:TIME:STARt 2ns; STOP 3 Restrict the time gate to the time interval between 2 ns and 3 ns.
  • Page 660 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameters: <SidebandSupp> Sideband suppression Range: 10 dB to 120 dB Increment: 10 dB *RST: 32 dB Default unit: dB Example: *RST; :CALC:FILT:TIME:WIND DCH Reset the instrument and select a Dolph-Chebyshev time gate for filtering the data in the frequency domain.
  • Page 661 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: *RST; :CALC:FILT:TIME:SHAP? Reset the instrument and query the type of time gate used. The response is WIDE. Manual operation: "Shape" on page 367 CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:SHOW <Boolean> Enables or disables permanent display of the gate limits.
  • Page 662 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameters: <StopTime> Start or stop time of the time gate. Range: -100 s to +99.999999999998 s (start time ) and -99.999999999998 s to +100 s (stop time) Increment: 0.1 ns *RST: -1E-009 s (start time) to +4E-009 s (stop time)
  • Page 663 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <TimeGateFilter> BPASs | NOTCh BPASs Band pass filter: Pass all information in specified time region and reject everything else NOTCh Notch filter: Reject all information in specified time region and...
  • Page 664 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference ..................666 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CLEar ................667 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CONTrol[:DATA] ................668 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CONTrol:SHIFt ..................668 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DATA ................669 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DCIRcle:CLEar ................669 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DCIRcle:DATA ............. 669 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DCIRcle:DISPlay[:STATe] ................670 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DCIRcle[:STATe] .................670 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DELete:ALL ................670 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DISPlay[:STATe] ..................671 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:FAIL? .....................671 CALCulate:LIMit:FAIL:ALL? ..................672 CALCulate:LIMit:FAIL:DATA? ................
  • Page 665 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <CenterX> Range: Virtually no restriction for center coordinates. *RST: Default unit: NN <CenterY> Range: Virtually no restriction for center coordinates. *RST: Default unit: NN <Radius>...

  • Page 666: Calculate:Limit:clear

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Manual operation: "Limit Check" on page 445 CALCulate:LIMit:CIRCle:FAIL:ALL? [<ChannelSetup>] Returns a 0 or 1 to indicate whether or not the circle limit check has failed for at least one channel in the referenced channel setup. 0 represents pass and 1 represents fail Query parameters: <ChannelSetup>...

  • Page 667: Calculate:Limit:control[:Data]

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Usage: Event Manual operation: "Clear Test" on page 434 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CONTrol[:DATA] <StartStim>, <StopStim>[, ...] Defines the stimulus values of the limit line and/or creates new limit line segments. See also Chapter 9.4.1.1, "Rules for limit line...

  • Page 668: Calculate:Limit:control:shift

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: *RST; :CALC:LIM:CONT 1 GHZ, 2 GHZ Select a lin. frequency sweep (default) and define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 GHz and 2 GHz, using default response values (–40 dB).

  • Page 669: Calculate:Limit:dcircle:clear

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Range: 0, 1, 2 (see above) <StartStim>, Stimulus and response values of the first and last points of the <StopStim>, limit line segment. <StartResp>, The unit of the stimulus values is adjusted to the sweep type of <StopResp>...

  • Page 670: Calculate:Limit:dcircle[:State]

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> If set to ON, the line of the display circle is shown whenever the related trace is displayed in complex format.

  • Page 671: Calculate:Limit:fail

    Tip: Use to perform a composite (global) limit check. CALCulate:CLIMits:FAIL? Since V2.20 of the R&S ZNL/ZNLE FW the result is automatically recalculated when- ever a relevant setting is changed, i.e. a subsequent query will return the updated limit violation state.

  • Page 672: Calculate:limit:fail:data

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CALCulate:LIMit:FAIL:DATA? <TraceName>, <LimitFailType> Returns those sweep points that have caused a limit violation of the given <LimitFail- Type> for trace <TraceName>. Query parameters: <TraceName> Trace name, uniquely identifying the related trace <LimitFailType>...

  • Page 673: Calculate:Limit:lower:feed

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference – creates upper limit line segments 2s+1, 2s+3, ..., 2k-1 with (type=upper and) the given response values – creates "missing" lower limit line segments 2s+2, 2s+4, ..., 2k with (type=lower and) default response values If s>0, newly created lower/upper limit line segments inherit their start and stop stimuli...

  • Page 674: Calculate:Limit:lower:shift

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Setting parameters: <StimulusOffset> Stimulus offset value, used to shift all imported limit line seg- ments in horizontal direction. Default unit: NN <ResponseOffset> Response offset value, used to shift all imported limit line seg- ments in vertical direction.

  • Page 675: Calculate:Limit:segment:Amplitude:start

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference "Effective“ means: ● Only points within the sweep range and only active limit checks are considered. ● Disabled limit line segments (CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:TYPE OFF) are ignored. ● Both linear/logarithmic interpolation and limit line formulae are supported.

  • Page 676: Calculate:Limit:segment:count

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Tip: To define the response values of several limit line segments with a single com- mand, use CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:LOWer[:DATA] CALCulate<Chn>: LIMit:UPPer[:DATA]. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Seg> Segment number Parameters: <Response>...

  • Page 677: Calculate:Limit:segment:Formula

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:FORMula <Formula> Defines a custom formula for limit line segment <Seg> of the related trace. The formula is only used, if CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:FORMula set to ON. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Seg>...

  • Page 678: Calculate:Limit:segment:Interpol

    ([SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep: TYPE). Default units are Hz for frequency sweeps, dBm for power sweeps (R&S ZNL only), and s for time sweeps. For CW mode sweeps, stimulus values are dimensionless. Default unit: NN User Manual 1178.5966.02 ─ 19...

  • Page 679: Calculate:Limit:segment:Type

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: CALC:LIM:DATA 1,1500000000, 2000000000,2,3 Define an upper limit line segment (segment no. 1) in the stimu- lus range between 1.5 GHz and 2 GHz, assigning response val- ues of +2 dB and +3 dB.

  • Page 680: Calculate:Limit:state

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - Fail beep on or off. *RST: Example: CALC:LIM:STAT ON; SOUN ON Switch the limit check on and activate the fail beep.

  • Page 681: Calculate:Limit:ttlout[:State]

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:TTLout<Pt>[:STATe] <Boolean> Switches the TTL pass/fail signals on or off. The signals are applied to the USER PORT as long as the active trace <Chn> is within limits, including the ripple limits.
  • Page 682 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference ..........688 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:EXCursion:STATe ................ 688 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FORMat ............688 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:FORMat ............689 CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:BWIDth:GMCenter ..........689 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:BWIDth:MODE ............689 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:CENTer ......... 689 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:FUNCtion:CENTer ........690 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER[:RANGe] ....690 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER[:RANGe] ........690 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER:SHOW ....690 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER:SHOW ........691 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER:STARt ........691 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER:STOP...

  • Page 683: Calculate:Marker:Aoff

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference ..............703 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:X ...................704 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:Y ..............704 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:Y CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:AOFF Removes all markers from all traces of the active channel setup. The removed markers remember their properties (stimulus value, format, delta mode, number) when they are restored (CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>[:STATe]...

  • Page 684: Calculate:marker:coupled[:State]

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference <Mk> This numeric suffix is ignored and may be set to any value because the bandfilter search functions always use markers M1 to M4. Parameters: <Bandwidth> Difference between the band edges and the center response value of a bandfilter peak;...

  • Page 685: Calculate:marker:coupled:type

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: Suppose that the active channel setup contains traces Trc1 and Trc2, assigned to channels no. 1 and 2, respectively. :CALC2:PAR:SEL 'TRC2'; :CALC2:MARK1 ON; MARK2 Select Trc2 as the active trace of channel 2 and activate mark- ers 1 and 2 for it.
  • Page 686 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameters: <OutFormat> MLINear | MLOGarithmic | PHASe | POLar | GDELay | REAL | IMAGinary | SWR | LINPhase | LOGPhase | IMPedance | ADMittance | DEFault | COMPlex | MDB | MLPHase |...

  • Page 687: Calculate:Marker:Delta[:State]

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference SCPI MIMPedance "Imp Mag" for reflection measurement traces "Imp Mag series" for transmission measurement traces MPIMpedance "Imp Mag" for reflection measurement traces "Imp Mag parallel" for transmission measurement traces MADMittance "Adm Mag" for reflection measurement traces "Adm Mag series"...

  • Page 688: Calculate:Marker:Excursion:state

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk> Marker number (ignored for reference markers) Parameters: <Value> Minimum peak excursion The unit is derived from the active trace format and cannot be modified.

  • Page 689: Calculate:marker:function:bwidth:gmcenter

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Manual operation: "Marker Format" on page 453 CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:BWIDth:GMCenter <arg0> Defines how bandfilter searches calculate the center frequency of the passband or stopband. Parameters: <arg0> ON – use geometric mean of lower and upper band edge OFF –...

  • Page 690: Calculate:Marker:Function:domain:user[:Range]

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference <Mk> Marker number (ignored for reference markers) *RST; :CALC:MARK ON Example: Create marker 1 in the center of the current sweep range and assign it to trace no. 1. CALC:MARK:FUNC:CENT Leave the sweep range unchanged.

  • Page 691: Calculate:Marker:Function:domain:user:start

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk> Marker number (ignored for reference markers) Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - range limit lines on or off. *RST: Example: CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:DOMain:USER Manual operation: "Range Limit Lines On"...
  • Page 692 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk> Marker number Ignored for reference markers and for bandfilter searches (BFILter), which always use markers M1 to M4. Setting parameters: <SearchMode>...

  • Page 693: Calculate:Marker:Function:result

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:RESult? CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:FUNCtion:RESult? Returns the result (stimulus and response value) of a search started by means of CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:EXECute CALCulate<Chn>: MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:FUNCtion:EXECute. The search must be executed before the command is enabled. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk>...

  • Page 694: Calculate:Marker:Mode

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference <Mk> Marker number (ignored for reference markers) *RST; :CALC:MARK ON Example: Create marker 1 in the center of the current sweep range and assign it to trace no. 1. CALC:MARK:FUNC:STAR Divide the sweep range in half, starting at the current marker position.

  • Page 695: Calculate:Marker:mpeak:excursion

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: Suppose that the active channel setup contains an active trace no. 1. CALC:MARK:REF:MODE DISC CALC:MARK2:REF:MODE CONT Create the reference marker in discrete mode and marker 2 in continuous mode. CALC:MARK:REF ON; :CALC:MARK2 ON Display the two markers.

  • Page 696: Calculate:Marker:mpeak:threshold:state

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameters: <Value> Threshold value The unit is derived from the active trace format and cannot be modified. Changing the trace format resets the threshold to a format-specific default value. Manual operation: "Threshold Settings"...

  • Page 697: Calculate:Marker:search:bfilter:result[:State]:Area

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameters: <Boolean> ON - show the bandfilter search results. If no bandfilter search has been initiated before (CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>: BFILter), nothing is displayed. FUNCtion:EXECute OFF - hide the bandfilter search results. *RST: Example: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:BWIDth...

  • Page 698: Calculate:Marker:Search:tracking

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Target Format Description Formula (Voltage) Standing Wave Ratio SWR = (1 + |z|) / (1 – |z|) DEFault Identical to trace format. Note: the Smith and Polar traces use "Lin Mag" as the default for- mat for target value.

  • Page 699: Calculate:Marker[:State]

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference They are only available, if a search mode is active for the respective marker (see CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:EXECute <SearchMode> CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:FUNCtion:EXECute <Search Mode>), in which case tracking causes the search logic to be repeated after each sweep.

  • Page 700: Calculate:Marker[:State]:Area

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer[:STATe]:AREA <HorizontalPos>, <VerticalPos> Moves the marker info field for the active trace <Chn> to one of nine predefined posi- tions in the active diagram. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <HorizontalPos>...

  • Page 701: Calculate:Marker:Threshold

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:THReshold <Value> CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:THReshold <TargetSearchVal> Defines a marker-specific threshold value for (single) peak searches with the related marker (see "Marker addressing" on page 681) . CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:THReshold:STATe CALCulate<Chn>: to activate it. MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:THReshold:STATe Suffix: <Chn>...
  • Page 702 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference NORMal: If tracking is enabled (CALCulate<Chn>: MARKer<Mk>:SEARch:TRACking ON CALCulate<Chn>: ON), the mark- MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:SEARch:TRACking er's stimulus value (CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:X? CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:X?) is updated automatically with every sweep, otherwise it is fixed. The marker position (CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:Y? CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:Y?) is adjusted...

  • Page 703: Calculate:Marker:X

    -1 to +1. Otherwise -9.9E+11 Hz to +9.9E+11 Hz for frequency sweeps, -999 dBm to +999 dBm for power sweeps (R&S ZNL only), 0 s to 127500 s for time sweeps and 1 to 100001 for CW mode.
  • Page 704 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:Y <ResponseValue> CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:Y <RefResponseValue> Sets or gets the (response) value of the related marker (see "Marker addressing" on page 681). The marker must be created before using CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>[:STATe] CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence[:STATe] Setting this value is only possible in ARBitrary mode (see CALCulate<Chn>:...
  • Page 705 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference ..................706 CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:FUNCtion ..............706 CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:FORMatted:FUNCtion ..................707 CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:MEMorize ..................708 CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:STATe ..............708 CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:FORMatted:STATe ................708 CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:WUNit[:STATe] CALCulate<Chn>:MATH[:EXPRession]:SDEFine <Expression> CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:FORMatted[:EXPRession]:SDEFine <Expression> Defines a mathematical trace for the active trace, using a string expression. ● The expression in the first command refers to raw, unformatted trace data (complex data).
  • Page 706 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Type Complete List Description Operators - + , - , * , / , ^ Basic arithmetic operations; ^ for exponentiation Functions linMag (), dBMag (), Arg (), Mathematical functions with one or two arguments...
  • Page 707 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: *RST; :CALC:MATH:MEM Copy the current state of the default trace 'Trc1' to a memory trace named 'Mem2[Trc1]'. The memory trace is not dis- played. CALC:MATH:FUNC DIV Define a mathematical trace, dividing the raw complex data trace trace by the stored memory trace.
  • Page 708 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:STATe <Boolean> CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:FORMatted:STATe <Boolean> Activates or deactivates trace math for unformatted and/or formatted trace data, i.e. the trace formulae defined via CALCulate<Chn>:MATH[:EXPRession]:SDEFine and/or CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:FORMatted[:EXPRession]:SDEFine, respec- tively. When trace math is active either for unformatted or formatted data, the resulting math- ematical trace is calculated and displayed instead of the active data trace.

  • Page 709: Calculate:Parameter:catalog

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: *RST; CALC:PAR:SDEF 'Trc1', 'a1' Reset the instrument and select a wave quantity a for the trace Trc1. DISP:WIND:TRAC:FEED 'Trc1' Display the generated trace in the active window. CALC:MATH:SDEF '1.1*Data'; STAT ON Define a mathematical trace and display it instead of the active data trace.

  • Page 710: Calculate:Parameter:define:sgroup

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11' Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S CALC4:PAR:CAT? Query the traces assigned to channel 4. If Ch4Tr1 is the only trace assigned to channel 4, the response is 'CH4TR1,S11'.

  • Page 711: Calculate:Parameter:copy

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference e.g. S for <log_port1> = 1, <log_port2> = 2. If only one logical port <log_port1> is specified, a single trace with the reflection coefficient S is created. <log_port1><log_port1> Trace names The generated traces are assigned the following trace names: <Ch_name>_SG_S<log_port1><log_port1>,...

  • Page 712: Calculate:Parameter:delete

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <TraceName> Name of the new trace (i.e. the copy). Note that trace names must be unique within the active setup. <ToNewDiag>...

  • Page 713: Calculate:parameter:delete:all

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CALCulate:PARameter:DELete:ALL Deletes all traces in all channels of the active channel setup, including the default trace Trc1 in channel 1. The manual control screen shows "No Trace". Example: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DELete Usage: Event Manual operation: "Delete Trace"...

  • Page 714: Calculate:Parameter:measure

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure <TraceName>, <Result> Assigns a measurement result to an existing trace. The query returns the result assigned to the specified trace (no second parameter; see example). Note: To create a new trace and at the same time assign the attributes, use CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine.

  • Page 715: Calculate:Parameter:measure:sended Calculate:Parameter:sdefine

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number Setting parameters: <TraceName> Trace name <Result> Measured quantity Manual operation: "S-Parameter (selector)" on page 395 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine <TraceName>, <Result> Creates a trace and assigns a channel number, a name and a measurement parame- ter to it.
  • Page 716 'Pmtr1D1' | 'Pmtr1D2, 'Pmtr2D1' | 'Pmtr2D2'', ... Power sensor measurement using a power meter 'Pmtr<no>' and analyzer source port 'D1' or 'D2' (R&S ZNL only) *) Selecting a parameter Y...<n><m> or Z...<n><m> sets the range of port numbers to be considered for the Y and Z-parameter measurement to <n>:<m>.

  • Page 717: Calculate:Parameter:sdefine:sended Calculate:Parameter:select

    ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine:SENDed <TraceName>, <Result> Creates a trace and assigns a channel number, a name and a measurement parame- ter to it. The trace becomes the active trace in the channel but is not displayed.
  • Page 718 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CALCulate:RIPPle... The CALCulate:RIPPle... commands define the ripple limits and control the ripple limit check..................718 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:CLEar ..............718 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:CONTrol:DOMain ..................719 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:DATA ................720 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:DELete:ALL ............... 720 CALCulate:RIPPle:DISPlay:RESult:ALL[:STATe] ............... 721 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:DISPlay[:STATe] ..................721 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:FAIL? ..................721 CALCulate:RIPPle:FAIL:ALL? ..............722...
  • Page 719 FLIN | FLOG | FSEG | FSINgle | TLIN | TLOG Keywords for the units of the stimulus values; frequency, power (R&S ZNL only), and time units. The selected unit must be compatible with the sweep type (see on page 971): Hz for FLIN, [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TYPE...
  • Page 720 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference The unit of a stimulus value is adjusted to the sweep type of the active channel ([SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TYPE), the unit of a rip- ple limit is adjusted to the format of the active trace (CALCulate<Chn>:FORMat).
  • Page 721 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:DISPlay[:STATe] <Boolean> Displays or hides all ripple limit lines (including all ranges) associated to the active trace. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - ripple limit line on or off.
  • Page 722 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Usage: Query only Manual operation: "Ripple Check" on page 441 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:RDOMain:FORMat <UnitRef> Deletes the existing ripple limit ranges and (re-)defines the physical unit of the ripple limit. The units of the stimulus values are defined via CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:...
  • Page 723 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Manual operation: "Range List" on page 443 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGMent<Seg>:LIMit <Limit> Defines the ripple limit for ripple limit range no. <Seg>. A range must be created first to enable this command (e.g. CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:DATA). See Chapter 9.4.1.2,...
  • Page 724 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: *RST; CALC:RIPP:DATA 1, 1500000000, 2000000000, Define and enable a ripple limit range in the stimulus range between 1.5 GHz and 2 GHz, assigning a ripple limit of +3 dB. CALC:RIPP:STAT ON; SEGM:RES? Enable the limit check and query the result for the created range.
  • Page 725 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameters: <StimValue> Stimulus values (unitless) confining the ripple limit range. The unit is adjusted to the sweep type of the active channel ([SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TYPE). Range: Virtually no restriction for ripple limit ranges. *RST:...
  • Page 726 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:STATe:AREA <HorizontalPos>, <VerticalPos> Moves the ripple test info field for the active trace <Chn> to one of nine predefined positions in the active diagram. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <HorizontalPos>...
  • Page 727 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:DOMain:USER <EvalRange> Selects one out of 10 evaluation ranges to be configured with the CALCulate<Chn>: STATistics:DOMain:USER:SHOW, CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:DOMain: USER:STARt, and com- CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:DOMain:USER:STOP mands. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <EvalRange>...
  • Page 728 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameters: <Stop> Start or stop value of the evaluation range. Default unit: NN Example: CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:DOMain:USER Manual operation: "Evaluation Range" on page 382 CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:EPDelay[:STATe] <Boolean> CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:MMPTpeak[:STATe] <Boolean> CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:MSTDdev[:STATe] <Boolean> These commands display or hide the "Phase/El Length" results, the "Min/Max/Peak- Peak"...
  • Page 729 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference to retrieve the CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RESult? compression results. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: dBValue Compression value Example: CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP: RESult? Manual operation: "Compr. Point / Compr. Val." on page 379 CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:PHASe <PhaseValue>...
  • Page 730 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RDOMain:USER:SHOW <Boolean> Displays or hides range limit lines for the reference range selected via CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RDOMain:USER. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF – reference range limit lines on or off.
  • Page 731 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Manual operation: "Reference Value" on page 380 CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RESult? Returns the compression point of an S-parameter or ratio measured in a power sweep. For dB formatted traces, the compression value x is set via CALCulate<Chn>:...
  • Page 732 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Manual operation: "Defined Value" on page 381 CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RMARker <Marker> Allows you to select the marker whose value shall be used as the reference ("small sig- nal value") for the compression point calculation.
  • Page 733 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP: RESult? Manual operation: "Compr. Point / Compr. Val." on page 379 CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:RESult? <Result> Returns a single statistical parameter of the trace no. <Chn> or all parameters. It is not necessary to display the info field (CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics[:STATe]...
  • Page 734 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Manual operation: "Min/Max/Peak-Peak, Mean/Std Dev/RMS" on page 376 CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:RMS[:STATe] <Boolean> CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:SFLatness[:STATe] <Boolean> These commands display or hide the "RMS" and the "Flatness/Gain/Slope" results in the diagram area of trace no. <Chn>. Suffix: <Chn>...
  • Page 735 ● CALCulate:TRANsform... (other)................795 CALCulate:TRANsform:DTFault... The CALCulate:TRANsform:DTFault... commands set up and control a distance to fault measurement (with option R&S ZNL-K3). For the R&S ZNLE the Distance to Fault option K3 is not available..............736 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:CENTer ..............736 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:SPAN ..............
  • Page 736 :CALCulate1:TRANsform:DTFault:CENTer 2; SPAN 2 Example: Defines the DtF distance window of the active trace of channel 1 via its center (2m) and span (2m). Options: R&S ZNL-K3 Manual operation: "Start Distance / Stop Distance" on page 369 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:DEFine <CblName>, <CblPermittivity>, <CblAtt1>, <CblFreq1>{, <CblAtt2>, <CblFreq2>}...
  • Page 737 Defines a new cable type "My cable type" with relative permittiv- ity ε =1.1 and the frequency-dependent attenuation given in the table below. Usage: Setting only Options: R&S ZNL-K3 Manual operation: "Add / Delete" on page 374 Table 11-8: Example: frequency-dependent attenuation table Frequency Attenuation 1 GHz 0.01 dB/m...
  • Page 738 R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Usage: Query only Options: R&S ZNL-K3 Manual operation: "Fault Table" on page 375 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:PEAK:DATA<FaultNo> If the active trace of channel <Chn> is a Distance to Fault (DtF) trace and DtF limit checking is enabled, this query returns the peak data of DtF limit violation <FaultNo>...
  • Page 739 *RST; :CALCulate1:TRANsform:DTFault:STATe ON makes the active trace of channel 1 a DtF trace. CALCulate1:TRANsform:DTFault:PEAK:THReshold -30 sets the DtF limit to -30 dB. Options: R&S ZNL-K3 Manual operation: "Fault Limit" on page 372 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:POINts If the active trace of channel <Chn> is a Distance to Fault (DtF) trace, this command starts the "Auto Number of Points"...
  • Page 740 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Usage: Event Options: R&S ZNL-K3 Manual operation: "Auto Number of Points" on page 370 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:SELect <DtfSelectCable> Selects one of the available (predefined or user-defined) cable types for Distance to Fault measurements. Suffix: <Chn>...
  • Page 741 OFF|ON – DtF disabled|enabled *RST: Example: :CALCulate1:TRANsform:DTFault:STATE ON turns the DtF representation of the active trace of channel 1 ON. Options: R&S ZNL-K3 Manual operation: "Distance to Fault" on page 368 CALCulate:TRANsform:TIME... The CALCulate:TRANsform:TIME... commands control the transformation into the time domain (see Chapter 9.7.1, "Time domain...
  • Page 742 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Manual operation: "Time Start / Time Stop / Time Center / Time Span" on page 315 Note: If the x-axis is scaled in distance units (CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME: DISTance), then the center value is entered in m; the range and default value XAXis changes accordingly.
  • Page 743 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:LPASs:DCSParam <DCValue> Defines the DC value for low pass transforms. The command is enabled only if the sweep points are on a harmonic grid (to be set explicitly or using CALCulate<Chn>: TRANsform:TIME:LPASs).
  • Page 744 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:LPASs:DCSParam Manual operation: "DC Value" on page 364 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:LPASs:DCSParam:EXTRapolate Extrapolates the measured trace towards f = 0 and overwrites the current DC value (CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:LPASs:DCSParam). The command is rele- vant for low pass time domain transforms.
  • Page 745 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:SPAN <Span> Defines the time span of the diagram in time domain. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Span> Time span of the diagram in time domain.
  • Page 746 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> ON - time domain representation active. OFF - frequency domain representation active. *RST: Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:TIME:STAT? Reset the instrument, activating a frequency sweep, and query whether the default trace is displayed in the time domain.
  • Page 747 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Note: If the x-axis is scaled in distance units (CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME: DISTance), then the stop value is entered in m; the range and default value XAXis changes accordingly. CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME[:TYPE] <TransformType> Selects the time domain transformation type.
  • Page 748 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:XAXis <Unit> Switches over between the x-axis scaling in time units or distance units. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Unit> TIME | DISTance TIME - x-axis scaled in time units.
  • Page 749 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameter Circuit model Pictogram Serial C, shunt C Serial L, shunt L Shunt L, serial C Shunt C, serial L Shunt C, serial C Shunt L, serial L SHLC Shunt L, shunt C Serial C, shunt L User Manual 1178.5966.02 ─...
  • Page 750 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameter Circuit model Pictogram Serial L, shunt C Serial C, shunt C Shunt C, serial L Shunt L, serial C Shunt C, serial C Table 11-10: Circuit models for balanced port (and port pair) de-/embedding...
  • Page 751 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameter Circuit model Pictogram SLST Shunt L, serial Touchstone (.s2p) data SCST Shunt C, serial Touchstone (.s2p) data CSSL Serial Cs, shunt L LSSC Serial Ls, shunt C CSSC Serial Cs, shunt C...
  • Page 752 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameter Circuit model Pictogram SCCS Shunt C, serial Cs SLLS Shunt L, serial Ls STSG Serial Touchstone (.s2p) data, shunt C SGST Shunt C, serial Touchstone (.s2p) data GSSL Serial Cs, shunt L...
  • Page 753 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameter Circuit model Pictogram SGLS Shunt C, serial Ls SGGS Shunt C, serial Cs Table 11-11: Circuit models for port set de-/embedding Parameter Circuit model Pictogram FIMPort File import, no circuit model STSL, ..., SGGS...
  • Page 754 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameter Circuit model Pictogram Shunt C Shunt C Table 11-13: Circuit models for differential match embedding Parameter Circuit model Pictogram FIMPort File import, generic 2-port (no circuit model) SHLC Shunt L, shunt C CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:DEEMbedding<LogPt>:...
  • Page 755 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>:PARameters: ......................763 L<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>:PARameters: ......................764 R<Cmp> ....765 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>[:STATe] ..766 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>:TNDefinition CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:DIFFerential:EMBedding<LogPt>: ..................766 PARameters:C<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:DIFFerential:EMBedding<LogPt>: ....................766 PARameters:DATA CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:DIFFerential:EMBedding<LogPt>: ..................767 PARameters:G<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:DIFFerential:EMBedding<LogPt>: ...................768 PARameters:L<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:DIFFerential:EMBedding<LogPt>: ..................768 PARameters:R<Cmp> .... 769 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:DIFFerential:EMBedding<LogPt>[:STATe] ..769...
  • Page 756 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference ....785 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>:TNDefinition ....785 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PSET:DEEMbedding<ListId>:DEFine ....... 785 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PSET:EMBedding<ListId>:DEFine CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:DEEMbedding<PhyPt>: ..................786 PARameters:C<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:DEEMbedding<PhyPt>: ....................787 PARameters:DATA CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:DEEMbedding<PhyPt>: ..................787 PARameters:G<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:DEEMbedding<PhyPt>: ...................788 PARameters:L<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:DEEMbedding<PhyPt>: ..................789 PARameters:R<Cmp> ..... 790 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:DEEMbedding<PhyPt>[:STATe] ..790 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:DEEMbedding<PhyPt>:TNDefinition CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt>:PARameters: ......................
  • Page 757 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced: to select the adequate circuit model DEEMbedding<LogPt>:TNDefinition before executing this command. ● to load MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:BALanced:DEEMbedding<LogPt> circuit data from a Touchstone file located at the R&S ZNL/ZNLE's file system. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <LogPt> Logical port number <Port> Port assignment for two 2-port networks:...
  • Page 758 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference FPORts (or omitted) Standard port sequence (odd port numbers towards VNA, even port numbers towards DUT) IPORts – Two-port networks: inverted port sequence (network port 2 towards VNA, network port 1 towards DUT) –...
  • Page 759 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:DEEMbedding<LogPt>: PARameters:L<Cmp> <CircuitModel>, <Inductance> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:DEEMbedding<LogPt>: PARameters:L<Cmp>? <CircuitModel> Specifies the inductance value L<Cmp> in the different circuit models for balanced port deembedding. In the query form, the <Inductance> parameter must be omitted. The command returns the inductance value for the specified circuit model.
  • Page 760 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference <LogPt> Logical port number (balanced port) <Cmp> Number of resistance in circuit model. The total number of resis- tances depends on the selected circuit model. Parameters: <Resistance> Resistance R<Cmp> for the specified circuit model.
  • Page 761 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Manual operation: "Active" on page 539 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:DEEMbedding<LogPt>: TNDefinition <CircuitModel> Selects the circuit model for balanced port deembedding. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <LogPt> Logical port number (balanced port) Parameters: <CircuitModel> FIMPort | STSL | STSC | SLST | SCST | CSSL | LSSC | CSSC |...
  • Page 762 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>: to select the adequate circuit model before executing this com- TNDefinition mand. ● to load cir- MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt> cuit data from a Touchstone file located at the R&S ZNL/ZNLE's file system. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <LogPt> Logical port number <Port>...
  • Page 763 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference SGATes Swapped gates (even port numbers towards VNA, odd port numbers towards DUT) SINCreasing Swapped increasing port sequence (high port numbers towards VNA, low port numbers towards DUT) <arg1> <block_data> Content of a Touchstone file (*.s2p or *.s4p) in IEEE488.2 Block data format.
  • Page 764 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference In the query form, the <Inductance> parameter must be omitted. The command returns the inductance value for the specified circuit model. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <LogPt> Logical port number (balanced port) <Cmp>...
  • Page 765 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameters: <Resistance> Resistance R<Cmp> for the specified circuit model. Range: -10 MΩ to 10 MΩ. Increment: 1 mΩ (1E-3 Ω) *RST: 0 Ω for all resistances connected in series with an inductance. 10 MΩ for all resistances connected in parallel with a capacitance Default unit: Ω...
  • Page 766 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>: TNDefinition <CircuitModel> Selects the circuit model for balanced port embedding. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <LogPt> Logical port number (balanced port) Parameters: <CircuitModel> FIMPort | STSL | STSC | SLST | SCST | CSSL | LSSC | CSSC |...
  • Page 767 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:DIFFerential:EMBedding<LogPt> load circuit data from a Touchstone file located at the R&S ZNL/ZNLE's file system instead. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <LogPt> Logical port number of a balanced port Setting parameters: <Interchange> FPORts | IPORts | SGATes...
  • Page 768 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:DIFFerential:EMBedding<LogPt>: PARameters:L<Cmp> <CircuitModel>[, <Inductance>] Specifies the inductance value L in the "Shunt L, Shunt C" lumped element model for differential match embedding. In the query form, the <Inductance> parameter must be omitted.
  • Page 769 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:DIFFerential:EMBedding<LogPt>[: STATe] <Boolean> Enables or disables differential match embedding for balanced port <LogPt>. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <LogPt> Logical port number (balanced port) Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - embedding active or inactive...
  • Page 770 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:DEEMbedding:PARameters:C <CircuitModel>, <Capacitance> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:DEEMbedding:PARameters:C? <CircuitModel> Specifies the capacitance value C in the different circuit models for ground loop embedding. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number Parameters: <Capacitance> Capacitance C for ground loop deembedding. Range: -1mF to 1 mF.
  • Page 771 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:DEEMbedding:PARameters:L <CircuitModel>, <Inductance> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:DEEMbedding:PARameters:L? <CircuitModel> Specifies the inductance value in the different circuit models for ground loop deembed- ding. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number. Parameters: <Inductance> Inductance L for ground loop deembedding. Range: -1 H to 1 H.
  • Page 772 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameters for setting and query: <CircuitModel> SL | SC Possible circuit models (character data); see Table 11-12. Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:VNET:GLO:DEEM:PAR:R? SC; R? SL Query the default resistances for ground loop deembedding. The response is 10000000;...
  • Page 773 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding:PARameters:C <CircuitModel>, <Capacitance> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding:PARameters:C? <CircuitModel> Specifies the capacitance value C in the different circuit models for ground loop embedding. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number. Parameters: <Capacitance> Capacitance C for ground loop embedding. Range: -1mF to 1 mF.
  • Page 774 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding:PARameters:L <CircuitModel>, <Inductance> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding:PARameters:L? <CircuitModel> Specifies the inductance value in the different circuit models for ground loop embed- ding. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number. Parameters: <Inductance> Inductance L for ground loop embedding. Range: -1H to 1 H.
  • Page 775 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameters for setting and query: <CircuitModel> SL | SC Possible circuit models (character data); see Table 11-12. Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:VNET:GLO:EMB:PAR:R? SC; R? SL Query the default resistances for ground loop embedding. The response is 10000000;...
  • Page 776 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId>:DEFine <PP_First>,<PP_Second>,<PP_First>,... Creates one or more port pairs for port set deembedding. The command can be used repeatedly to extend or (partially) overwrite the list of port sets for deembedding. CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PSET:DEEMbedding<ListId>: on page 785 for general port set definition.
  • Page 777 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <ListId> Index of the affected port pair (see CALCulate<Ch>: TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId>: DEFine) <1|2|3> Index i of the capacitance C<i> in the related lumped circuit model. If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1.
  • Page 778 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameters: <Conductance> Conductance G<i> for the specified circuit model. Range: -1kS to 1 kS. Increment: 1 nS (1E-9 S) *RST: Default unit: Siemens (SI unit symbol: S) Parameters for setting and query: <CircuitModel>...
  • Page 779 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId>: PARameters:R<1|2|3> <CircuitModel>[, <Resistance>] Specifies the resistance value R<i> in the different lumped circuit models for port pair deembedding. In the query form, the <Resistance> parameter must be omitted. The command returns the resistance value for the specified circuit model.
  • Page 780 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: *RST; CALC:TRAN:VNET:PPA:DEEM:DEF 1,2,3,4 Define a port pair configuration with port pairs (1,2) and (3,4). CALC:TRAN:VNET:PPA:DEEM1:TND CSSL Select the Serial Cs, shunt L circuit model for the first port pair. CALC:TRAN:VNET:PPA:DEEM1:PAR: R3 CSSL, 2.2E+3; CALC:TRAN:VNET:PPA:DEEM1 ON Increase the resistance R3 for the Serial Cs, shunt L circuit model to 2.2 kΩ...
  • Page 781 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference <ListId> Index of the defined port set within the channel's overall list of port sets for embedding. Port sets for embedding must be numbered consecutively, i.e. port set <ListId> can only be created if port set <ListId>-1 already exists.
  • Page 782 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameters: <Capacitance> Capacitance Ci Range: -1 mF to 1 mF Increment: 1 fF (1E-15 F) *RST: 1 pF (1E-12 F) Default unit: F Parameters for setting and query: <CircuitModel> STSC | SCST | CSSL | LSSC | CSSC | SLCS | SCLS | SCCS | STSG | SGST | GSSL | LSSG | GSSG | SLGS | SGLS | SGGS Circuit model whose capacitance C<i>...
  • Page 783 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir: EMBedding<ListId>[:STATe] Manual operation: "Network" on page 553 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>:PARameters: R<1|2|3> <arg0>, <Resistance> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>:PARameters: R<1|2|3>? <arg0> Specifies the resistance value R<i> in the different lumped circuit models for port pair embedding. In the query form, the <Resistance> parameter must be omitted. The command returns the resistance value for the specified circuit model.
  • Page 784 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference In the query form, the <Conductance> parameter must be omitted. The command returns the conductance value for the specified circuit model. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <ListId> Index of the affected port pair (see CALCulate<Ch>:...
  • Page 785 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: *RST; CALC:TRAN:VNET:PPA:EMB:DEF 1,2,3,4 Define a port pair configuration with port pairs (1,2) and (3,4). CALC:TRAN:VNET:PPA:EMB1:TND CSSL Select the Serial Cs, shunt L circuit model for the first port pair. CALC:TRAN:VNET:PPA:EMB1:PAR: R3 CSSL, 2.2E+3; CALC:TRAN:VNET:PPA:EMB1 ON Increase the resistance R3 for the Serial Cs, shunt L circuit model to 2.2 kΩ...
  • Page 786 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <ListId> Index of the defined port set within the channel's overall list of port sets for deembedding/embedding. Parameters: <Port1>, <Port2>, ... A port set consist of two or more (different) ports.
  • Page 787 TNDefinition mand. ● to load cir- MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:SENDed:DEEMbedding<PhyPt> cuit data from a Touchstone file located at the R&S ZNL/ZNLE's file system. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <PhyPt> Physical port number Setting parameters: <Interchange>...
  • Page 788 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameters: <Conductance> Conductance G<Cmp> for the specified circuit model. Range: -1kS to 1 kS. Increment: 1 nS (1E-9 S) *RST: Default unit: Siemens (SI unit symbol: S) Parameters for setting and query: <CircuitModel>...
  • Page 789 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:DEEM:PAR:L1? SLL Query the default inductance L1 for the Shunt L, serial L circuit model. The response is 1E-009 (1 nH). CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:DEEM:PAR:L1 SLL, 2.2E-9 Increase the inductance to 2.2 nH.
  • Page 790 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:DEEMbedding<PhyPt>[: STATe] <Boolean> Enables or disables the deembedding function for single ended ports. It is allowed to change the circuit model and its parameters while deembedding is enabled. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <PhyPt>...
  • Page 791 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt>: to select the adequate circuit model before executing this com- TNDefinition mand. ● to load circuit MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt> data from a Touchstone file located at the R&S ZNL/ZNLE's file system. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <PhyPt> Physical port number Setting parameters: <Interchange>...
  • Page 792 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference FPORts (or omitted) Standard port sequence (network port 1 towards VNA, network port 2 towards DUT) IPORts | SGATes Inverted port sequence (network port 2 towards VNA, network port 1 towards DUT) <arg1>...
  • Page 793 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt>: PARameters:L<Cmp> <CircuitModel>, <Inductance> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt>: PARameters:L<Cmp>? <CircuitModel> Specifies the inductance value L<Cmp> in the different circuit models for single ended port embedding. In the query form, the <Inductance> parameter must be omitted. The command returns the inductance value for the specified circuit model.
  • Page 794 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference <Cmp> Number of resistance in circuit model. The total number of resis- tances depends on the selected circuit model. Parameters: <Resistance> Resistance R<Cmp> for the specified circuit model. Range: -10 MΩ to 10 MΩ.
  • Page 795 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt>: TNDefinition <CircuitModel> Selects the circuit model for single ended port embedding. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <PhyPt> Physical port number Parameters: <CircuitModel> FIMPort | CSL | LSC | CSC | LSL | SLC | SCL | SCC | SLL | SHLC | GSL | LSG | GSG | SLG | SGL | SGG Possible circuit models (character data);...
  • Page 796 Returns a 0 or 1 to indicate whether or not a global, composite limit check on several traces has failed. Since V2.20 of the R&S ZNL/ZNLE FW the result is automatically recalculated when- ever a relevant setting is changed, i.e. a subsequent query will return the updated limit violation state.
  • Page 797 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: *RST; CALC:LIM:CONT 1 GHZ, 2 GHZ Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 GHz and 2 GHz, using default response values. CALC:LIM:STAT ON; FAIL? Switch the limit check on and query the result.
  • Page 798 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Note: The analyzer allows arbitrary combinations of display formats and measured quantities; see Chapter 10.8, "Format softtool", on page 415 and CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter... commands. Nevertheless, it is advisable to check which display formats are generally appropriate for an analysis of a particular mea- sured quantity;...
  • Page 799 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference ISMith Displays z in an inverted Smith diagram GDELay For frequency sweeps only Calculates the group delay at the related sweep point and displays it in a Cartesian diagram REAL Calculates Re(z) = x and displays it in a Cartesian...
  • Page 800 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: *RST; :CALC:FORM GDEL Select group delay calculation for the active trace. CALC:GDAP:SCO 15 Select an aperture of 15 steps. Manual operation: "Aperture Points" on page 420 CALCulate<Chn>:IAVerage:MODE <Mode> Selects the quantities to be averaged if infinite averaging is enabled (CALCulate<Chn>:IAVerage[:STATe]...
  • Page 801 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameters: <HoldFunc> MIN | MAX | OFF MIN - Enable the min hold function. MAX - enable the max hold function. OFF - disable the max hold or min hold function. *RST: Example: *RST;...
  • Page 802 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CALCulate:TDVSwr[:STATe] <Boolean> Enables/disables time domain site VSWR measurements. Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF – TD-VSWR on or off. *RST: 11.5.2.2 CONFigure commands The CONFigure... commands create and delete channels or traces, assign channel and trace names, and define the channel sweep order.
  • Page 803 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Manual operation: "Channel table" on page 528 CONFigure:CHANnel:MEASure:ACTive[:STATe] <Boolean> If set to ON (1), only the active channel is measured. All other channels are switched off temporarily, i.e. until CONFigure:CHANnel:MEASure:ACTive is set to OFF.
  • Page 804 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: *RST; *RST creates channel 1, trace 1, and diagram 1. :INITiate1:CONTinuous OFF enable single sweep mode CALC2:PAR:SDEF 'Ch2Tr1', 'S11' CALC3:PAR:SDEF 'Ch3Tr1', 'S11' CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11' create additional channels 2, 3 and 4 with one trace each...
  • Page 805 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:NAME <ChannelName> Assigns a name to channel number <Ch>. The channel must be created before (CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>[:STATe] ON). Moreover it is not possible to assign the same name to two different channels. returns a list CONFigure:CHANnel:CATalog? of all defined channels with their names.
  • Page 806 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Create channel no. <Ch> and/or sets it as the active channel. CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch> ON creates channels without traces, so that no measurement can be initiated. Use CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine <TraceName>, <Result> to create traces or a channel and a trace in one go.
  • Page 807 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: *RST; :CONF:CHAN:TRAC:REN 'Testtrace_1' Reset the analyzer to create a default trace in channel 1 and set this trace as the active trace. Rename the trace 'Testtrace_1'. CALC:PAR:SDEF 'Testtrace_2', 'S11' Create a new trace which will become the active trace in chan- nel no.
  • Page 808 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Suffix: <Trc> Trace number. This suffix is ignored; the trace is referenced by its name. Query parameters: <TraceName> Trace name, e.g. 'Ch2Trc2'. Example: CONFigure:TRACe:CATalog? Usage: Query only Manual operation: "New Channel" on page 526 CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:CHANnel:NAME:ID? <TraceName>...
  • Page 809 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Suffix: <Trc> Trace number. This suffix is not relevant and may be omitted (the command returns the actual trace number). Query parameters: <TraceName> Trace name, e.g. 'Ch2Trc2'. Example: CONFigure:TRACe:CATalog? Usage: Query only CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:REName <OldTraceName>, <NewTraceName>...
  • Page 810 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Query parameters: <TraceName> Trace name (string), e.g. 'Trc1' Example: *RST; :CALC:PAR:SDEF 'Trc2', 'S11' Create a trace named Trc2. CONF:TRAC:WIND:TRAC? 'Trc2' Query the diagram number for Trc2. The new trace is not dis- played, so the response is 0.
  • Page 811 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference ● The value defined with CONTrol:AUXiliary:C[:DATA] is assigned to the active channel (INSTrument:NSELect <Ch>). ● The signals at the Aux. Port connector reflect the channel bits of the measuring channel, i.e. the channel for which the analyzer performs a sweep. This channel is not necessarily identical with the active channel.
  • Page 812 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference 11.5.2.4 DIAGnostic commands The DIAGnostic... commands provide access to service and diagnostic routines used in service, maintenance and repair. In accordance with the SCPI standard, all commands are device-specific....................812 DIAGnostic:DUMP:SIZE ..................812...
  • Page 813 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameter type Physical unit Power DBM, DB, DBW, W, MW, UW, NW, PW Voltage V, MV, UV, NV, PV, DBV, DBMV, DBUV Phase DEG, KDEG, MDEG, UDEG, NDEG, PDEG Group delay S, MS, US, NS, PS...
  • Page 814 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference .......... 829 DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel ........830 DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition ..........831 DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:ZOOM:BOTTom ............831 DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:ZOOM:TOP ..........832 DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:ZOOM:STARt ..........832 DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:ZOOM:STOP ..........832 DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:ZOOM[:STATe] DISPlay:ANNotation:CHANnel[:STATe] <Boolean> DISPlay:ANNotation:TRACe[:STATe] <Boolean> Shows or hides the channel/trace list(s) in all diagrams of the current channel setup.
  • Page 815 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Manual operation: "Content Selection" on page 430 DISPlay:IWINdow:MARKer<Mk>[:STATe] <TraceName>, <Boolean> Defines the markers to be displayed in the Info Window. Suffix: <Mk> Marker number. Parameters: <Boolean> 0 – Marker <Mk> of trace <TraceName> is displayed 1 –...
  • Page 816 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameters: <LayoutId> Integer value 1, 2 ... Current number, as defined by DISPlay:LAYout:DEFine. Example: Creating diagrams Manual operation: "Additional Functionality: SCPI Commands" on page 427 DISPlay:LAYout:DEFine <LayoutId>, <LayoutFormatMode>, <LayoutData> DISPlay:LAYout:DEFine? <LayoutId> Creates a horizontal or vertical display layout and provides it with an identifier (<Layou- tId>).
  • Page 817 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference DISPlay:LAYout:EXECute <LayoutData> Creates and displays a horizontal or vertical display layout. The query returns the lay- out data of the currently displayed layout (the last layout selected via DISPlay: LAYout:APPLy) in executable format.
  • Page 818 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Manual operation: "Diagrams / Rows / Columns" on page 427 DISPlay:LAYout:JOIN <MainLayoutId>, <DiagramNumber>, <SubLayoutId> Creates a nested layout, inserting a sub-layout into one of the diagrams of a main lay- out. Main layout and sub-layout must be defined previously, preferably using DISPlay:LAYout:DEFine.
  • Page 819 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameters: <RelFontSize> Relative font size Range: 80 % to 170 % *RST: 100 % Default unit: percent Example: *RST; :DISP:RFS 80 Use smaller fonts to gain more space for the traces in the dia- gram.
  • Page 820 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Suffix: <Wnd> Number of the diagram area to become the active diagram area. DISPlay:WINDow<Wnd>:MAXimize acts on all diagrams of the current channel setup, however, the diagram no. <Wnd> is displayed on top of the others.
  • Page 821 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>][:STATe] <Boolean> Creates or deletes a diagram area, identified by its area number <Wnd>. Suffix: <Wnd> Number of the diagram area to be created or deleted. Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - creates or deletes diagram area no. <Wnd>.
  • Page 822 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - displays or hides the title. *RST: Example: DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TITLe:DATA Manual operation: "Show Title" on page 424 DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:CATalog? Returns the numbers and names of all traces in diagram area no. <Wnd>.
  • Page 823 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe:EFEed <TraceName> Assigns an existing trace (CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine <TraceName>) to a diagram area <Wnd>, and displays the trace. Use DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]: to assign the trace to a diagram area using a numeric suffix TRACe<WndTr>:FEED (e.g.
  • Page 824 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameters: <TraceName> String parameter for the trace name, e.g. 'Trc4'. Example: CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11' Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S DISP:WIND2:STAT ON Create diagram area no. 2.
  • Page 825 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameters: DALL – all data traces <TraceName> MALL – all memory traces <string> – single trace identified by its trace name (string param- eter), e.g. 'Trc4'. ON | OFF – display or hide traces.
  • Page 826 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:Y:OFFSet <MagnitudeFactor>[, <PhaseFactor>[, <RealPart>[, <ImaginaryPart>]]] Modifies all points of the trace <WndTr> by means of an added and/or a multiplied complex constant. The response values M of the trace are transformed according to: Suffix: <Wnd>...
  • Page 827 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference <WndTr> Existing trace number, assigned by means of DISPlay[: WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:FEED. This suffix is ignored if the optional <TraceName> parameter is used. Setting parameters: <Activate> ONCE Activate the autoscale function. <TraceName> Optional string parameter for the trace name, e.g. 'Trc4'. If this...
  • Page 828 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference <TraceName> Optional string parameter for the trace name, e.g. 'Trc4'. If this optional parameter is present, both numeric suffixes are ignored (trace names must be unique across different channels and win- dows).
  • Page 829 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11' Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S DISP:WIND2:STAT ON Create diagram area no. 2. DISP:WIND2:TRAC9:FEED 'CH4TR1' Display the generated trace in diagram area no. 2, assigning the trace number 9 to it.
  • Page 830 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11' Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S DISP:WIND2:STAT ON Create diagram area no. 2. DISP:WIND2:TRAC9:FEED 'CH4TR1' Display the generated trace in diagram area no. 2, assigning the trace number 9 to it.
  • Page 831 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11' Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S DISP:WIND2:STAT ON Create diagram area no. 2. DISP:WIND2:TRAC9:FEED 'CH4TR1' Display the generated trace in diagram area no. 2, assigning the trace number 9 to it.
  • Page 832 These commands specify the start and stop values of the zoom window (left and right border), respectively. In contrast to manual control, all or part of the zoom window may be outside the original diagram. The range of possible values depends on the R&S ZNL/ZNLE's frequency range; see "[SENSe:]FREQuency..." on page 941.
  • Page 833 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference <TraceName> Optional string parameter for the trace name, e.g. 'Trc4'. If this optional parameter is present, both numeric suffixes are ignored (trace names must be unique across different channels and win- dows).
  • Page 834 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: FORM REAL, 32 Select real data format. SYST:COMM:GPIB:RTER EOI Set the terminator to EOI. (During a calibration) ... CORR:CDAT? 'REFLTRACK',1,0 Query a system error correction term. The data is transferred in a definite length block which can be written to a file;...
  • Page 835 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: MMEM:NAME 'C:\Screenshots\PLOT1.BMP' Define a printer file name (without creating the file), assuming that .BMP is the current file format (see HCOPy:DEVice: LANGuage). HCOP:DEST 'MMEM'; :HCOP Select 'Print to file' and create the printer file specified before.
  • Page 836 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: HCOP:ITEM:ALL Select the complete information to be printed. HCOP Start printing. Usage: Event HCOPy:ITEM:LOGO[:STATe] <Boolean> Qualifies whether or not the printed output contains the logo. The default R&S logo (file Logo.gif) is stored in the Resources\Images subdirectory of the VNA program directory and can be replaced by another logo.
  • Page 837 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin:BOTTom <LowMargin> Defines the distance between the bottom of the page and the bottom of the printed information. Parameters: <LowMargin> Lower margin Range: 0.01 mm to 10000 mm *RST: n/a (*RST does not affect the printer configuration) Example: HCOP:PAGE:MARG:BOTT 10;...
  • Page 838 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation <Orientation> Defines the orientation of the printed page. Switching between LANDscape and PORTrait rotates the hardcopy result by 90 degrees. No other settings are changed. Parameters: <Orientation> LANDscape | PORTrait LANDscape - long edge of the paper is the top of the page.
  • Page 839 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameters: <Boolean> ON - the analyzer measures continuously, repeating the current sweep. OFF - the measurement is stopped after the number of sweeps defined via [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:COUNt. INITiate<Ch>[: initiates a new measurement cycle.
  • Page 840 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameters: <Boolean> ON - the analyzer measures continuously in all channel, repeat- ing the current sweep. The query returns ON (1) if at least one channel is measured continuously. OFF - the measurement is stopped after the number of sweeps defined via [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:COUNt.
  • Page 841 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Manual operation: "Restart Sweep" on page 344 INITiate<Ch>[:IMMediate]:SCOPe <Scope> Selects the scope of the single sweep sequence. The setting is applied in single sweep mode only (INITiate<Ch>:CONTinuous OFF). Suffix: <Ch> Channel number Parameters: <Scope>...
  • Page 842 R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference INSTrument:TPORt:COUNt? Returns the total number of test ports. Because the R&S ZNL/ZNLE doesn't support switch matrices, this is always the same as the number of analyzer ports (see INSTrument:PORT:COUNt?). Usage: Query only 11.5.2.10 LAYOut commands LAYout:CATalog[:WINDow]? Queries the name and index of all active windows.
  • Page 843 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference .................. 849 MMEMory:LOAD:CKIT:UDIRectory ..................849 MMEMory:LOAD:CORRection ................850 MMEMory:LOAD:CORRection:MERGe ................851 MMEMory:LOAD:CORRection:RESolve .............. 852 MMEMory:LOAD:CORRection:TCOefficient<Ch> ....................853 MMEMory:LOAD:LIMit ....................854 MMEMory:LOAD:RIPPle .....................855 MMEMory:LOAD:SEGMent ....................856 MMEMory:LOAD:TRACe ..................857 MMEMory:LOAD:TRACe:AUTO ........ 857 MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:BALanced:DEEMbedding<LogPt> ........857 MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>...
  • Page 844 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: MMEM:AKAL:FACTory:CONVersion 'C:\Users\Public\ Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\ZNL\AKAL\Touchstone' Convert and copy the factory calibration data of the active cali- bration unit to the specified (writable) directory. Usage: Setting only Manual operation: "Apply/Cancel" on page 480 MMEMory:AKAL:USER:CONVersion <Directory>[, <CalKitFile>] Converts an arbitrary (e.g.
  • Page 845 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Query parameters: <CalKitFile> Path to the cal kit file, either absolute or relative to the current directory (see MMEMory:CDIRectory) <Detail> CONNector | LABel | NAME | GENDer If specified, the command only returns the corresponding prop-...
  • Page 846 Afterwards execute MMEMory:LOAD:CABLe 'C:\dtf-cables' to update existing and create new user-defined cable types. Usage: Setting only Options: R&S ZNL-K3 Manual operation: "Add / Delete" on page 374 MMEMory:LOAD:CKIT <CalKitFile> Loads cal kit data from the specified cal kit file.
  • Page 847 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference <StandardType> MMTHrough | MFTHrough | FFTHrough | MMLine | MMLine1 | MMLine2 | MMLine3 | MFLine | MFLine1 | MFLine2 | MFLine3 | FFLine | FFLine1 | FFLine2 | FFLine3 | MMATten | MFATten |...
  • Page 848 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference MMEMory:LOAD:CKIT:SDATa:WLABel <ConnectorType>, <CalKitName>, <KitLabel>, <StandardType>, <StandardLabel>, <TouchstoneFile>[, <FirstPort>[, <SecondPort>]] Loads characterization data from the given Touchstone file; similar to existing com- mand but supports cal kit addressing by label. MMEMory:LOAD:CKIT:SDATa Setting parameters: <ConnectorType>...
  • Page 849 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Connector and calibration kit names must be entered as string parameters. The strings contain the connector and cal kit names used in the Calibration Kits dialog; a Ω in the name must be replaced by 'Ohm', e.g.: –'NewKit1' denotes the user-defined calibration kit "NewKit1".
  • Page 850 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: MMEM:STOR:CORR 1,'Calgroup1.cal' Copy the current correction data set of channel 1 to a cal group file Calgroup1.cal. CONF:CHAN2:STAT ON; :MMEM:LOAD:CORR 2, 'Calgroup1.cal' Apply the stored correction data (cal group file) to channel 2.
  • Page 851 Cal group files must have the extension *.cal. The direc- tory must not be specified; the analyzer always uses the default path C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\ZNL \Calibration\Data. If there is no link between <Ch> and the specified file, the command has no effect. If no file is specified, the command resolves any link between <Ch>...
  • Page 852 SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection: TCOefficient:CALibration. Setting parameters: <TraceFile> String parameter specifying the name and directory of the loa- ded trace file. The R&S ZNL/ZNLE supports power meter cor- rection list files (*.pmcl, generated using MMEMory:STORe: CORRection:TCOefficient<Ch>), *csv, and Touchstone (*.s1p, *.s2p, ...) files.
  • Page 853 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference <Trace> Optional string parameter: For multiport Touchstone files (*.snp, n > 1), the parameter refers to a particular S-parame- ter trace ('S11', 'S12', ...). For ASCII (*.csv) files, the parameter references a trace name in the file (case sensitive). If the parameter is omitted, the first trace in the specified file is imported.
  • Page 854 Store the current trace data of Trc1 to a limit line file in Touch- stone format. MMEM:LOAD:LIM 'TRC1', 'C: \Users\Public\Documents \Rohde-Schwarz\ZNL\LIMitLines\Trc1.s1p', 'S11', 0, 2, LMAX Load the previously created Touchstone limit line file and assign the limit lines to Trc1, applying a response offset of 2 dB.
  • Page 855 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Setting parameters: <TraceName> Name of an existing trace in the active setup (string parameter). The imported ripple limit line is assigned to this trace, irrespec- tive of the trace information in the ripple limit file.
  • Page 856 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: Assume that the current channel setup contains two channels numbered 1 and 2, respectively, and that sweep segments have been defined for channel no. 1. MMEM:STOR:SEGM 1, 'C:\Users\Public\Documents\ Rohde-Schwarz\ZNL\SweepSegments\Seg_Ch1.SegList' Store the sweep segment definition of channel 1 to a sweep segment file.
  • Page 857 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: Assume that the current channel setup contains a trace named Trc1. MMEM:STOR:TRAC 'TRC1', 'C:\Users\Public \Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\ZNL\Traces\Trc1.s1p' Store the current trace data of Trc1 to a trace file. MMEM:LOAD:TRAC 'TRC1', 'C:\Users\Public \Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\ZNL\Traces\Trc1.s1p' Load the previously created trace file and create a memory trace assigned to Trc1.
  • Page 858 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced: DEEMbedding<LogPt>:TNDefinition CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform: VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>:TNDefinitionto select the desired circuit model before loading the data files. ● The FIMPort model requires a single *.s4p file and hence a single set com- mand. ● The circuit models STSL | STSC | SLST | SCST require 2 *.s2p files, that have to be assigned to the appropriate port using two set commands.
  • Page 859 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: *RST; SOUR:LPOR1 1,2; LPOR2 3,4 Define a balanced port configuration. CALC:TRAN:VNET:BAL:DEEM:TND STSL Select the "Serial .s2p data, shunt L" circuit model. MMEM:LOAD:VNET:BAL:DEEM2 'C:\Users\Public \Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\ZNL\VNET\Test.s2p', Load a Touchstone file and assign it to logical port no. 2.
  • Page 860 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number Parameters: <TouchstoneFile> String parameter to specify the name and directory of the loaded Touchstone file. If no path is specified the analyzer searches the current direc- tory, which can be set and queried using...
  • Page 861 Select the Serial Touchstone .s2p data, shunt L circuit mode for the second port pair. MMEM:LOAD:VNET:PPA:DEEM2 'C: \Rohde-Schwarz\ZNL\Traces\Test.s2p', PMA Load a Touchstone file and assign it to the second port pair. Manual operation: "File Name <i>/Inc. Seq. <i>/Swap Gates <i>"...
  • Page 862 Setting parameters: <OutputDir> Output Directory, must be created before the command is exe- cuted Example: on page 845 MMEMory:LOAD:CABLe Usage: Setting only Options: R&S ZNL-K3 Manual operation: "Add / Delete" on page 374 User Manual 1178.5966.02 ─ 19...
  • Page 863 If no path is specified the analyzer searches the current direc- tory, to be queried with MMEMory:CDIRectory? Example: MMEM:LOAD:CKIT 'C:\Users\Public\Documents \Rohde-Schwarz\ZNL\Calibration\Kits\New Kit 1.calkit' Load the previously created cal kit file New Kit 1.calkit from the default cal kit directory..:MMEM:STOR:CKIT 'New Kit 1', 'C:...
  • Page 864 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference MMEMory:STORe:CORRection <Channel>, <CalGroupFile> Copies the correction data of channel <Channel> to the cal pool, generating a new correction data file (cal group). The file has the extension *.cal and is stored in the C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\ZNL\Calibration\Data directory.
  • Page 865 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Setting parameters: <PmclFile> String parameter specifying the name and directory of the cre- ated power meter correction list file. The file extension *.pmcl is mandatory. If no path is specified, the analyzer searches the current direc-...
  • Page 866 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: *RST Reset the analyzer, creating the default trace no. 1 in channel no. 1. CALC:MARK ON; MARK:X 1GHz Create marker no. 1 and place it to 1 GHz. CALC:MARK2 ON; MARK2:X 2GHz Create a second marker and place it to 2 GHz.
  • Page 867 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference <SweepSegFile> String parameter to specify the name and directory of the cre- ated sweep segment file. The default extension (manual control) for sweep segment files is *.SegList, although other exten- sions are allowed.
  • Page 868 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference If the second optional parameter is omitted, the command stores complex data. <DecSeparator> POINt | COMMa POINt - decimal separator: point. COMMa - decimal separator: comma. If the third optional parameter is omitted, points are used.
  • Page 869 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference <FormatInd> FORMatted | UNFormatted UNFormatted - unformatted data export specified by the second optional parameter. FORMatted - formatted data export (for *.csv and *.dat files only). If the first optional parameter is omitted, the command stores unformatted data.
  • Page 870 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameters: <Boolean> MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:OPTion:COMMent <Comment> Defines a comment to be added to (the comment section of) exported trace files. This is a global setting, i.e. the comment string is used for each trace export in every open channel setup.
  • Page 871 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameters: <Boolean> Manual operation: "Trim Leading Whitespace" on page 144 MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:PORTs <Channel>, <TouchstoneFile>, <Format>[, <ModeImpedance>, <Port>[, <Port>]...] Generates an snpTouchstone file, where n is the number of specified ports. If ports 1 and 2 are specified and configured as balanced port, and if export of...
  • Page 872 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: Suppose that a full two-port calibration for ports 1 and 2 and channel 1 has been performed, and that a DUT with two bal- anced ports is connected. The analyzer measures an arbitrary mixed mode S-parameter.
  • Page 873 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameters: ON – channel bits 4 to 7 <Boolean> OFF – drive port 1 to 4 *RST: Example: OUTPut<Ch>:UPORt[:VALue] Manual operation: "Pin 16 - 19" on page 532 OUTPut<Ch>:UPORt:SEGMent<Seg>:STATe <Boolean> Enables or disables segment bits for the sweep segments in channel no. <Ch>; see OUTPut<Ch>:UPORt:SEGMent<Seg>[:VALue].
  • Page 874 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference ● The signals are switched on as soon as a measurement in a segment with non- zero segment bits is started. They are changed whenever a segment with different segment bits is measured.
  • Page 875 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: *RST; :SEGM:INS 1MHZ, 1.5MHZ, 111, -21DBM, 0.5S, 0, 10KHZ Create a sweep segment no. 1 with a sweep range between 1.0 MHz and 1.5 MHz. SWE:TYPE SEGM Set the segmented frequency sweep active.
  • Page 876 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference ● Pins 16 to 19 may be reserved for monitoring the drive ports 1 to 4 of the analyzer (OUTPut<Ch>:UPORt:ECBits OFF) . This leaves up to 16 different monitored channel states. Tip: You can use the active channel number as a parameter for OUTPut<Ch>:UPORt[:VALue] and monitor the activity of up to 255 different chan-...
  • Page 877 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference ..................877 PROGram[:SELected]:EXECute .................. 878 PROGram[:SELected]:INIMessage ................878 PROGram[:SELected]:INIParameter ..................879 PROGram[:SELected]:NAME ..................879 PROGram[:SELected]:RETVal? ....................880 PROGram[:SELected]:WAIT PROGram[:SELected]:EXECute <AppName> Starts an application process or open a file using an application available on the ana- lyzer.
  • Page 878 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference PROGram[:SELected]:INIMessage <IniFile>[, <SendValue>] Writes a message <SendValue> into the preferences (*.ini) file specified by <IniFile>. The message is entered into the [MESSAGE] section using the fixed key Send; the value for the fixed key Receive is set to an empty string.
  • Page 879 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference <Key> Key for the key/value pair(s). <Value> String or numeric value for the key/value pair(s). If a string parameter is supplied, it has to be enclosed in single or double quotes. PROG:INIP 'c:\preferences\myapp', Example: 'myparameter', 'myvalue', 'startf', 123.05...
  • Page 880 Example: PROGram[:SELected]:EXECute 11.5.2.14 [SENSe:] commands The [SENSe:]... commands affect the receiver settings of the R&S ZNL/ZNLE. [SENSe:]AVERage... The [SENSe:]AVERage... commands set sweep averaging parameters. The sweep average is a noise-reduction technique which consists of calculating each measure- ment point as an average of the same measurement point over several consecutive sweeps.
  • Page 881 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference [SENSe<Ch>:]AVERage:CLEar Starts a new average cycle, clearing all previous results and thus eliminating their effect on the new cycle. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number Example: SENS1:AVER:COUN 15; :AVER ON Set the average factor for channel 1 to 15 (the mnemonic SENS1 can be omitted) and enable the sweep average.
  • Page 882 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference REDuce Cumulative moving averages of the real and imaginary parts of each measurement result, provides the most effective noise sup- pression for the "Real" and "Imag" formats and for complex trace formats.
  • Page 883 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference [SENSe<Ch>:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:SELect <Selectivity> [SENSe<Ch>:]BWIDth[:RESolution]:SELect <Selectivity> Defines the selectivity of the IF filter for an unsegmented sweep. The value is also used for all segments of a segmented sweep, provided that separate selectivity setting is disabled ([SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:BWIDth[:RESolution]:SELect:CONTrol...
  • Page 884 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference [SENSe:]CORRection:CKIT:<StandardType> <ConnType>, <CalKitName>, <StandardLabel>, <MinFreq>, <MaxFreq>[, <DelayParam>, <Loss>, <Z0>[, <C0>, <C1>, <C2>, <C3>, <L0>, <L1>, <L2>, <L3>[, OPEN | SHORt | MATCh | <Resistance>[, <Port1>[, <Port2>]]]]] [SENSe:]CORRection:CKIT:<StandardType>? <ConnType>, <CalKitName>[, <Port1>[, <Port2>]] Defines the parameters of a (possibly non-ideal) 1 port or 2-port calibration standard <StandardType>...
  • Page 885 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: CORR:CKIT:FOP 'N 50 Ohm','New Kit 1', '', 0,4000000000,0,0,50,99,-2.3,0.22,0,0,0,0,0 Define the properties of the Open (f) standard for a N 50 Ω con- nector type in cal kit "New Kit 1". CORR:CKIT:FOP? 'N 50 Ohm' Query the properties of the Open (f) standard for a N 50 Ω...
  • Page 886 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference The parameters in the [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CKIT:<StandardType>, [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CKIT:<StandardType>:WLABels, and [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CKIT:<ConnectorType>:<StandardType> com- mands have the following meaning: Table 11-15: Parameter list Parameter Meaning Comment/Unit '<ConnType>' Name of the connector type. String parameter Use SENSe1:CORRection:CONNection:CATalog? to query connec- tor names.
  • Page 887 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Table 11-16: Standard types and their parameters <std_type> Meaning MOPen | FOPen Open: male (m) or female (f) MSHort | FSHort Short: m or f OSHort[<1|2|3>] | MOSHort[<1|2| Offset short: sexless, m or f (three standards each) 3>] | FOSHort[<1|2|3>]...
  • Page 888 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Manual operation: "Add / Copy / Delete / Standards..." on page 500 [SENSe:]CORRection:CKIT:DMODe <ConnectorType>, <CalKitName>, <KitLabel>, <Mode> Sets/gets the delay mode for the related cal kit (identified by connector type, name and label), i.e allows to toggle between ZVR compatible and Keysight modelling (see...
  • Page 889 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: CORR:CKIT:FOP 'N 50 Ohm','New Kit 1', '', 0,4000000000,0,0,50,99,-2.3,0.22,0,0,0,0,0 Create a new cal kit "New Kit 1" and assign an open (f) standard for the N 50 Ω connector type with specific properties.
  • Page 890 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Calibration kit names must be entered as string parameters. The string contains the cal kit name used in the calibration dialogs (e.g. "Calibration Presettings"); a "Ω" in the name must be replaced by Ohm, e.g.: ●...
  • Page 891 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference The delay parameter is returned according to the selected <DelayMode>; see Table 11-15. Query parameters: <ConnectorType> Name of the connector type. Use [SENSe<Ch>: to query connector ]CORRection:CONNection:CATalog? names. <CalKitName> String parameter containing the name of the calibration kit. See "Cal kit naming conventions "...
  • Page 892 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference [SENSe:]CORRection:CKIT:LCATalog? [<ConnectorType>] Returns a list of all cal kits and their labels for a given connector type or for all connec- tor types. Query parameters: <ConnectorType> Name of the connector type. Use [SENSe<Ch>:...
  • Page 893 CORR:CKIT:LLAB? 'New Kit 1', '2012-05-25' Check the label. MMEMory:STORe:CKIT: WLABel 'New Kit 1', '2012-05-25', 'C: \Users\Public\Documents \Rohde-Schwarz\ZNL\Calibration\Kits\New Kit 1 (2012-05-25).calkit' Store the data for the labelled cal kit to the cal kit file New Kit 1 (2012-05-25).calkit. CORR:CKIT:LDEL 'New Kit 1', '2012-05-25' Delete the kit.
  • Page 894 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: MMEM:LOAD:CKIT 'C:\Users\Public\ Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\ZNL\ Calibration\Kits\New Kit 1 (123456).calkit' Load the previously created cal kit file New Kit 1 (123456).calkit from the default cal kit direc- tory. CORR:CKIT:LSEL 'N 50 Ohm', 'New Kit 1', '123456' Assign the imported kit to the N 50 Ω...
  • Page 895 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Manual operation: "Add / Copy / Delete / Standards..." on page 500 [SENSe:]CORRection:CKIT:STANdard:LCATalog? <CalKitName>, <KitLabel> Returns a list of all standards in a given calibration kit. Query parameters: <CalKitName> Name of the cal kit. Use [SENSe:]CORRection:CKIT: to query cal kit names and labels.
  • Page 896 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Query parameters: <OnePort MOPen | FOPen | MSHort | FSHort | MOSHort | MOSHort1 | StandardType> MOSHort2 | MOSHort3 | FOSHort | FOSHort1 | FOSHort2 | FOSHort3 | MREFlect | FREFlect | MMTCh | FMTCh | MSMatch | FSMatch Standard type.
  • Page 897 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference ..........897 [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire]:SELected ..............899 [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO ..............900 [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:CKIT ............. 901 [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:CKIT:PASSword ............902 [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:CKIT:PORTs ..........902 [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:CKIT:PORTs:ADD ............ 903 [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:CONFigure ............904 [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:PORTs ..........905 [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:PORTs:CONNection? ..........906 [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:PORTs:TYPE ............907 [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:REPeat ...........
  • Page 898 ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference ● For a sliding match, the R&S ZNL/ZNLE can acquire measurement data for up to 20 positions per port. Multiple calls of [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire]:SELected SLIDe, <TestPort> for the same test port, implicitly increases the position until position 20 has been recorded.
  • Page 899 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference The UOSM algorithm provides the transmission factor of the unknown through standard up to an ambiguous sign. This yields the two alternative phase values displayed in the calibration wiz- ard; see Unknown Through Standard.
  • Page 900 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference – A VNA cal kit file name *.calkit without path refers to a specific cal kit file stored in the internal memory of the active cal- ibration unit. – A VNA cal kit file name without path but prefixed with "SD:"...
  • Page 901 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: CORR:COLL:AUTO:CKIT 'AutoCalChar' Generate a cal kit file AutoCalChar.calkit for the active cali- bration unit and store it in the calibration unit. SENSe:CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:CKIT 'SD:test1' Generate a cal kit file test1.calkit for the active calibration unit and store it in the calibration unit.
  • Page 902 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:CKIT:PORTs <Characterization>, <TestPort1>, <CalUnitPort1>[, <TestPort2>...] Generates a characterization (cal kit file) with the specified name containing the cal kit data of the active calibration unit (SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:ADDRess ). The cal kit file can be saved to a directory on the analyzer, to the calibration unit's internal (flash) memory or to an SD card inserted at the calibration unit (if available).
  • Page 903 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference <CalUnitPort1> Number of the calibration unit port, to whom test port <Test- Port1> is assigned. <TestPort2> Number of the second test port ... Example: Prerequisite: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:ADDRess 'MyCalU' Sets 'MyCalU' as the active calibration unit.
  • Page 904 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference OPTPort "One Path Two Ports" calibration If the selected cal unit characterization does not contain a Through characterization, the command will fail. FRTRans Transmission normalization, bidirectional If the selected cal unit characterization does not contain a Through characterization, the command will fail.
  • Page 905 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference auto-detection works you can use the simpler command [SENSe<Ch>: ]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO. ● If several calibration units are connected, use SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice: to select a unit for the calibration. AKAL:ADDRess Suffix: <Ch> Channel number of the calibrated channel Setting parameters: <Characterization>...
  • Page 906 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: CORR:COLL:AUTO:PORT '', 1, 2 Perform an automatic 1-port calibration at analyzer port 1, using the calibration unit's default calibration kit file and port 2 of the cal unit. CORR:COLL:AUTO:PORT:CONN? Query the actual port assignment. If the cal unit is properly con- nected according to the previous command, the response is 1,2,2,0.
  • Page 907 AKAL:ADDRess tion units (ICUs) that are connected to the selected ICS and that are used with factory characterization data . If set to ON (1), the R&S ZNL/ZNLE firmware adjusts the factory characterization data according to the ICU temperatures. Suffix: <Ch>...
  • Page 908 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:TYPE <CalType>[, <Characterization>[, <TestPort1>[, <TestPort2>]...]] Selects and initiates an automatic calibration at arbitrary analyzer and cal unit ports. This command also selects the calibration type. A progress monitor for the calibration sweeps is displayed.
  • Page 909 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:UTHRough <TestPort1>, <TestPort2> With this command, you can perform the Unknown Through measurement during an automatic UOSM calibration. Although it works for all calibration units, it is only useful if the calibration unit selected...
  • Page 910 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Enable the MCTYpes mode before defining the calibrations to be performed using [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:METHod:DEFine. Disable the MCTYpes mode after the calibrations were saved using [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection: COLLect:SAVE:SELected[:DUMMy]. The latter must be called only once, with <Ch>...
  • Page 911 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Port 1 Port 2 Channel 1 Short Short Reflection Normalization(Short) for ports 1 and 2 Channel 2 Open, Short, Match OSM for port 1 [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:CKIT:INSTall <CalKitFile>, <Gender>[, <Ports>] Allows you to load cal kit data by gender: ●...
  • Page 912 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:CKIT:PORT<PhyPt>? [<Detail>] Queries the cal kit data assigned to the given port via ● [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:CKIT:LOAD [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:CKIT:INSTall Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <PhyPt> Port number Query parameters: <Detail> CONNector | LABel | NAME | GENDer...
  • Page 913 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameters: <ConnectorType> N50Female | N50Male | N75Female | N75Male | PC7 | SMAFemale | SMAMale | PC35female | PC35male | PC292female | PC292male | PC24female | PC24male | PC185female | PC185male | S7_16female | S7_16male |...
  • Page 914 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:CONNection:PORTs <ConnectorType> Qualifies whether the connector types at the test ports (but not their gender) are equal or independent. Some calibration types require uniform port connector types. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number of the calibrated channel Parameters: <ConnectorType>...
  • Page 915 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: CORR:COLL:METH:DEF 'Test',RSHort,1 Select a one-port normalization at port 1 with a short standard as calibration type. CORR:COLL:SEL SHOR,1 Measure a short standard connected to port 1 and store the measurement results of this standard.
  • Page 916 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: *RST; CORR:COLL:FIXT:LMP:LOSS OFF Configure a fixture compensation measurement (for all chan- nels): The analyzer performs an Auto Length (no loss) calcula- tion. CORR:COLL:FIXT:ACQ OPEN, 2; :CORR:COLL:FIXT:ACQ SHOR, 4 Perform a fixture compensation sweep at port 2, terminated with an open standard, and at port 4, terminated with a short.
  • Page 917 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Table 11-17: Direct Compensation data #TestPorts File Type >=1 For 1-port Touchstone files (*.s1p) only a single test port can be specified - otherwise an error is raised. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number Parameters: <FixtureFile>...
  • Page 918 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameters: <Boolean> 1 - Auto Length (and Loss), depending on the last [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:FIXTure: LMParameter:LOSS[:STATe] setting 0 - Direct Compensation *RST: Example: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:FIXTure[: ACQuire] Manual operation: "Direct Compensation" on page 546 [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect:FIXTure:LMParameter:LOSS[:STATe] <Boolean>...
  • Page 919 (–100, "Command error;...") is generated. ● For a sliding match, the R&S ZNL/ZNLE can acquire and load measurement data for up to 20 positions per port. Multiple calls of [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:LOAD:SELected <CalGroupFile>, SLIDe, <TestPort>...
  • Page 920 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: Suppose that the cal pool contains a file 'Calgroup3.cal' with a valid through calibration for the active channel no. 1, which you want to include in a new TOSM calibration for ports 1 and 2.
  • Page 921 One Path Two Ports TOSM TOSM UOSM UOSM Not available for R&S ZNL/ZNLE3|4|6 with old VNA board (order no 1323.0070) Not available for R&S ZNL/ZNLE3|4|6 with old VNA board (order no 1323.0070) [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:SAVE:SELected:DEFault Generates a set of default correction data for the selected ports and calibration type.
  • Page 922 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference The main purpose of the default correction data set is to provide a dummy calibration which you can partly replace with your own, external correction data. You may have acquired the external data in a previous session or even on another instrument. If you...
  • Page 923 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: CORRection:COLLect:METHod:DEFine 'Test',RSHort, Select a one-port normalization at port 1 with a short standard as calibration type. CORRection:COLLect:CHANnels:ALL ON Enable calibration in all channels of the active channel setup. CORRection:COLLect:SELected SHOR,1 Measure a short standard connected to port 1 and store the measurement results of this standard.
  • Page 924 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference [SENSe:]CORRection... (other) The remaining [SENSe:]CORRection... commands...................924 [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CDATa ................926 [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection ............927 [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection:CATalog? .............. 927 [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection:DELete ............928 [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:DATA:PARameter<Sfk>? ............. 929 [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:DATA:PARameter:COUNt? ..................930 [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:DATE? ................. 930 [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:DELete ..............930 [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:EDELay:AUTO ............931 [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:EDELay<PhyPt>:DIELectric .............931...
  • Page 925 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Note: This command affects the active calibration of channel no. <Ch> or the factory calibration (if no channel calibration is active). For the factory calibration, the query form is allowed only (no change of factory calibration data).
  • Page 926 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Calibration type Parameters in Available error terms (depending on port num- [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection: bers) COLLect:METHod:DEFine One-port normalization (reflection) REFL, RSHort 'REFLTRACK' using an open or a short standard Full one port ("Refl OSM")
  • Page 927 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection:CATalog? Returns a list of the connector types of all calibration kits in use. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number. This suffix is ignored because connector types are channel-independent. Example: CORRection:CONNection:CATalog? Query connector types. Possible response: 'N 50 Ohm,N 75 Ohm,7 mm,3.5 mm,2.92 mm,2.4 mm,1.85...
  • Page 928 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Usage: Setting only Manual operation: "Connector / Gender" on page 484 [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:DATA:PARameter<Sfk>? [<SfkSettingType>[, <Index>]] Gets the settings of the active system error correction (or of the factory calibration, if no channel calibration is active).
  • Page 929 487 [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:DATA:PARameter:COUNt? Gets the number of active system error corrections for channel <Ch>. For the R&S ZNL/ZNLE the result is 0 (uncalibrated) or 1 (calibrated). The properties of the active system error correction can be queried using [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection: DATA:PARameter<Sfk>?.
  • Page 930 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:DATE? Returns the date and time when the active system error correction data for channel <Ch> was acquired (see example). Suffix: <Ch> Channel number of the calibrated channel Example: CORR:COLL:METH REFL1 Select a one-port normalization at port 1 as calibration type.
  • Page 931 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number Setting parameters: <Activate> ONCE Applies the auto length function. Example: *RST; :CORR:EDEL:AUTO ONCE Reset the instrument and apply the auto length function to the default trace (Trc1 in channel 1).
  • Page 932 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:EDELay<PhyPt>:ELENgth <ElecLength> Defines the offset parameter for test port <PhyPt> as an electrical length. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number of the offset-corrected channel <PhyPt> Port number of the analyzer Parameters: <ElecLength> Electrical length Range: -1E+9 m to +1E+9 m.
  • Page 933 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference [SENSe:]CORRection:EDELay:VNETwork <Boolean> Changes the position of the offset calculation in the "Offset Embed" calculation chain. Parameters: <Boolean> OFF (0) The offset is calculated before de-/embedding (default). ON (1) The offset is calculated after de-/embedding.
  • Page 934 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: *RST; :CORR:LOSS:AUTO ONCE Reset the instrument and apply the "Auto Length and Loss" function to the default trace (Trc1 in channel 1). Usage: Setting only Manual operation: "Auto Length and Loss"...
  • Page 935 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:LOSS<PhyPt>:SECond:STATe <Boolean> Defines whether the second reference frequency f is used for the offset loss approxi- mation. The second reference frequency and its associated loss value can be defined using [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:LOSS<PhyPt>:SECond:FREQuency [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:LOSS<PhyPt>:SECond.
  • Page 936 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: *RST; CORR:OFFS:DFC? Reset the instrument and query whether the analyzer uses direct fixture compensation data at port 1. The response is 0. Usage: Query only Manual operation: "Direct Compensation" on page 546 [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:OFFSet<PhyPt>[:STATe] <Boolean>...
  • Page 937 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: *RST; CORR:POW:ACQ AWAVe,1,PORT,1 Perform a receiver power calibration of the wave a using port 1 as a source port, assuming that the transmitted source power a is correct. No external cabling is needed.
  • Page 938 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference <SourcePort> Number of the port for the internal source. <CalOnlyPortFreq> Relevant for frequency conversion measurements only. OFF | 0 The reference receiver at port <CalPort> is calibrated for all fre- quencies that are relevant for any of the ports.
  • Page 939 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:POWer:DATA <Wave>, <CorrData>... Reads or writes receiver power correction data sets. A power correction data set con- tains n real values where: ● Each value corresponds to the ratio of the actual power at the receiver input (value provided by the used source) to the uncalibrated power in dB.
  • Page 940 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameters: <Boolean> Enables (ON) or disables (OFF) the receiver power calibration for the received waves b <PhyPt> *RST: Example: *RST; CORR:POW:ACQ BWAVe,1,PORT,2 Perform a receiver power calibration of the wave b1 using port 2 as a source port, assuming that the source power a is correct.
  • Page 941 The frequency ranges for the different instrument models are listed below; for more details refer to the data sheet. Table 11-18: Frequency ranges of R&S ZNL analyzers Frequency settings Start, Stop...
  • Page 942 R&S ZNLE-B100 R&S ZNL/ZNLE6 1 MHz to 6 GHz >1 MHz to < 6 GHz 1 Hz to 5.999 GHz R&S ZNL/ZNLE6 with 100 kHz to 6.0 GHz >100 kHz to < 6 GHz 1 Hz to 5.9999 GHz R&S ZNLE-B100 R&S ZNL/ZNLE6...
  • Page 943 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: *RST; :SYST:FREQ? MIN; :SYST:FREQ? MAX Query the frequency range of the analyzer. FREQ:CENT 100MHz Set center frequency to 100 MHz. FREQ:SPAN 50000 Set frequency span to 50 kHz. Manual operation: "Start Frequency / Stop Frequency / Center Frequency / Span Frequency"...
  • Page 944 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Tip: In a segmented frequency sweep, it is possible to set the sideband (SBANd) parameter individually for each segment; see [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>: DEFine. The [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:SBANd setting is global and not valid for segmented sweeps. The two sideband settings do not overwrite each other.
  • Page 945 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Manual operation: "Seg X-Axis" on page 332 [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:SPAN <Span> Defines the width (span) of the measurement and display range for a frequency sweep (sweep range). The default span equals to the maximum frequency range of the ana- –...
  • Page 946 Suffix: <Ch> Channel number Parameters: <arg0> *RST: Options: R&S ZNL-K2 Manual operation: "Automatic Harmonic Grid" on page 364 [SENSe<Ch>:]HARMonic:RTIMe:DATA <DUTRiseTime> Sets/gets the minimum rise time the user wishes to measure on the DUT. to select the underlying rise time [SENSe<Ch>:]HARMonic:RTIMe:THReshold definition.
  • Page 947 Suffix: <Ch> Channel number Parameters: <DUTRiseTime> Default unit: s Options: R&S ZNL/ZNLE-K2 Manual operation: "Rise Time/Rise Time Def." on page 316 [SENSe<Ch>:]HARMonic:RTIMe:THReshold <DUTRiseThreshold> Defines how the rise time that is set using [SENSe<Ch>:]HARMonic:RTIMe:DATA shall be interpreted. Allows to select between rise time definitions 20%-80% (default) and 10%-90%.
  • Page 948 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference <LogPt> Logical port number. The logical ports must be defined using SOURce<Ch>:LPORt<LogPt> <PhysicalPort1>, <PhysicalPort2>. An n port analyzer supports a maximum of n/2 (n even) or (n - 1)/2 (n odd) logical ports.
  • Page 949 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference [SENSe:]POWer... The [SENSe:]POWer... commands configure the optional receiver step attenuators (see Chapter 9.7.6, "Receiver step attenuators", on page 303)...................949 [SENSe<Ch>:]POWer:ATTenuation [SENSe<Ch>:]POWer:ATTenuation <arg0>[, <arg1>] Sets an attenuation factor for the received waves. This command is available if at least...
  • Page 950 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference ..............955 [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:DEFine:SELect ..............956 [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:DELete:ALL ............. 956 [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:DELete[:DUMMy] ............957 [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:CENTer? ............957 [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:SPAN? ............957 [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:STARt ............957 [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:STOP ................958 [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:INSert ..............960 [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:INSert:SELect ..............960 [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:POWer[:LEVel] .............961 [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent:POWer[:LEVel]:CONTrol ................961 [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>[:STATe] ..............962 [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:SWEep:DWELl...
  • Page 951 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Bandwidths can be set in 1 – 1.5 – 2 – 3 – 5 – 7 steps. The analyzer rounds up any entered value between these steps and rounds down values exceeding the maximum bandwidth.
  • Page 952 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: *RST; :SENS:SEGM:ADD Create a new sweep segment no. 1 in channel no. 1 using default settings and thus 10 kHz measurement bandwidth. SEGM:BWID 1 MHZ Increase the IF bandwidth to 1 MHz.
  • Page 953 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameters: <Boolean> ON - use independent selectivity settings, to be defined via [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:BWIDth[:RESolution]: SELect. OFF - reset the selectivity in all sweep segments to the selectiv- ity for unsegmented sweeps, defined via [SENSe<Ch>:...
  • Page 954 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:DEFine <StartFreq>, <StopFreq>, <Points>, <Power>, <SegmentTime>|<MeasDelay>, <Unused>, <MeasBandwidth>[, <LO>, <Selectivity>, <FreqSweepMode>] Creates or re-defines a sweep segment no. <Seg> with specific channel settings. Entry of the first seven numeric parameters is mandatory; no default values are provi- ded.
  • Page 955 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference <Unused> Ignored parameter (for compatibility with R&S ZVR analyzers). Should be set to the default value 0. <MeasBandwidth> IF bandwidth in the segment. See [SENSe<Ch>: ]SEGMent<Seg>:BWIDth[:RESolution]. Default unit: Hz <LO> POSitive | NEGative | AUTO Position of the local oscillator frequency LO relative to the RF frequency.
  • Page 956 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: SEGM1:DEF:SEL DWEL Select the measurement delay to determine the sweep time in a new sweep segment no. 1. SEGM1:DEF 1MHZ, 1.5MHZ, 111, -21DBM, 0.01S, 0, 10KHZ Create a sweep segment with a sweep range between 1.0 MHz and 1.5 MHz and a measurement delay of 10 ms.
  • Page 957 ]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:STARt [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>: FREQuency:STOP. [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:STARt <StartFreq> [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:STOP <StopFreq> These commands define the start and stop frequency of sweep segment no. <Seg>. The sweep segments must be within the frequency range of the R&S ZNL/ZNLE; see Table 11-18. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <Seg>...
  • Page 958 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Note: If the start frequency entered is greater than the current stop frequency, the stop frequency is set to the start frequency. If the stop frequency entered is smaller than the current start frequency, the start frequency is set to the stop frequency.
  • Page 959 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference <SegmentTime> Duration of the sweep in the segment. See [SENSe<Ch>: ]SEGMent<Seg>:SWEep:TIME. In the setting [SENSe<Ch>: DWELl, this parameter is ]SEGMent<Seg>:INSert:SELect replaced by <MeasDelay>. Range: Depending on other channel settings. AUTO acti- vates automatic sweep time setting in the segment, which is equivalent to the minimum sweep time possible.
  • Page 960 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:INSert:SELect <TimeRef> Defines whether the sweep time of a new segment, i.e. numeric parameter no. 5 of the command [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:INSert, is entered as a segment sweep time ("Segment Time") or as a measurement delay ("Meas Delay").
  • Page 961 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent:POWer[:LEVel]:CONTrol <Boolean> Selects common or independent internal source "Power" settings for the sweep seg- ments. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number Parameters: ON – use independent power settings, to be defined via <Boolean> [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:POWer[:LEVel].
  • Page 962 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:SWEep:DWELl <MeasDelay> Defines the delay time for each partial measurement in sweep segment no. <Seg> ("Meas. Delay"). If coupling of the segments is switched on ([SENSe<Ch>: ON), the delay is valid for all sweep seg- ]SEGMent<Seg>:SWEep:DWELl:CONTrol...
  • Page 963 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameters: ON – use independent delay settings, to be defined via <Boolean> [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:SWEep:DWELl. OFF – reset the delay in all sweep segments to the delay for unsegmented sweeps, defined via [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep: DWELl.
  • Page 964 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <Seg> Sweep segment number Parameters: <SegSweepTime> Segment time. The minimum segment time depends on the other channel settings, in particular on the number of points ([SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:SWEep:POINts), the IF bandwidth ([SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:BWIDth[:...
  • Page 965 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameters: ON – use independent segment sweep time settings, to be <Boolean> defined via [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:SWEep:TIME. OFF – reset the segment sweep time in all sweep segments to the segment sweep time for unsegmented sweeps, defined via [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TIME.
  • Page 966 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference ................... 969 [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TIME ..................970 [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO ...................971 [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TYPE [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:COUNt <Sweep> Defines the channel-specific number of sweeps to be measured and buffered in single sweep mode (INITiate<Ch>:CONTinuous OFF). Use [SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt: to define the sweep count for all channels.
  • Page 967 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameters: <MeasDelay> Measurement delay before each partial measurement. Changing the delay leaves the number of points unchanged but has an impact on the duration of the sweep ([SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep: TIME). Range: 0 s to 13680 s...
  • Page 968 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameters: <SweepPoint> Number of points per sweep Range: see above *RST: Example: *RST Reset the instrument, activating a frequency sweep with 201 sweep points. SWE:TIME? Query total sweep time. SWE:POIN 2010 Multiply the (default) number of points by 10.
  • Page 969 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number Parameters: <StepSize> Frequency step size. The step size is equal to the current sweep spandivided by the number of sweep points minus one (see [SENSe<Ch>: and [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:POINts?, ]FREQuency:SPAN? respectively).
  • Page 970 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameters: <SweepDuration> Sweep time. The minimum possible sweep time depends on the other channel settings, in particular on the number of points ([SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:POINts), the IF bandwidth ([SENSe<Ch>:]BWIDth[:RESolution]) and the measure- ment delay for each partial measurement ([SENSe<Ch>:...
  • Page 971 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TYPE <Format> Selects the sweep type, i.e. the sweep variable (frequency/time) and the position of the sweep points across the sweep range. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number. Parameters: <Format> LINear | LOGarithmic | CW | POINt | SEGMent...
  • Page 972 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference [SENSe<Ch>:]COUPle <Mode> Determines the order of partial measurements and sweeps (see Chapter 9.1.4.1, "Par- tial measurements and driving mode", on page 188). Suffix: <Ch> Channel number. This suffix is ignored; the sweep mode applies to all channels in the active channel setup.
  • Page 973 401 11.5.2.15 SOURce commands The SOURce... commands affect the source settings of the R&S ZNL/ZNLE. Port-specific and general settings The SOURce... subsystem comprises channel-specific and general settings. Chan- nel-specific settings are valid for the channel specified by the numeric suffix <Ch>...
  • Page 974 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference <PhyPt> Test port number of the analyzer. This suffix is ignored because the selected frequency applies to all source ports in the active channel. Parameters: <FixedFreq> Fixed stimulus and analyzer frequency. *RST:...
  • Page 975 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference <Grp> Port group number. This suffix is ignored: only <Grp>=1 is supported. Setting parameters: <arg0> If ALL is specified, all port groups are dissolved and a default port group 1, consisting of all available ports, is restored; the <Grp>...
  • Page 976 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: (for SOURce<Ch>:POWer:CORRection[:ACQuire] equivalent command SOURce:POWer:CORRection: NREadings) Manual operation: "Flatness Cal – Max Iterations" on page 510 SOURce:POWer:CORRection:COLLect:AVERage:NTOLerance <Tolerance> Specifies the maximum deviation of the measured power from the target power of the calibration.
  • Page 977 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: *RST; SOUR:POW:CORR:COLL:VER 0 Disable the verification sweep to speed up the source power cal- ibration procedure. SOUR:POW:CORR:COLL:FLAT OFF; RREC ON Disable flatness cal and enable reference receiver calibration. SOUR:POW:CORR:ACQ PORT,1 Perform a single source power calibration sweep using port 1 as a source port.
  • Page 978 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Note: It is not possible to disable flatness calibration (see SOURce:POWer: on page 976) and reference receiver calibration CORRection:COLLect:FLATness simultaneously. Parameters: <Boolean> Disables (OFF|1) or enables (ON|1) reference receiver calibra- tion. *RST:...
  • Page 979 SOUR:POW:CORR:TCO:DEL:ALL; :SOUR:POW:CORR:TCO? Clear the entire list. Query whether the transmission coefficients are still used. The response is 0. MMEM:LOAD:CORR:TCO 'C:\Users\Public\Documents \Rohde-Schwarz\ZNL\Traces\Test.s2p', 'S21' Load a power loss list from a previously created 2-port Touch- stone file. Manual operation: "Two Port Config..."...
  • Page 980 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: SOURce:POWer:CORRection:TCOefficient[:STATe] on page 983 Usage: Query only Manual operation: "Frequency / Transm. Coefficients: Insert, Delete, Delete All" on page 515 SOURce:POWer:CORRection:TCOefficient:DEFine<ListNo> <Frequency>, <TransCoeff>[, <DeEmbedding Position>] Adds a new frequency and transmission coefficient to the end of the transmission coef- ficient list.
  • Page 981 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference SOURce:POWer:CORRection:TCOefficient:DELete:ALL [<DeEmbedding Position>] Clears the transmission coefficient list. Parameters: <DeEmbedding BOTH | DUT | PM Position> Determines the two-port the command refers to: The two-port between VNA and DUT (during measurement) The two-port between VNA and PM (during power calibration)
  • Page 982 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference (parameter omitted) If the parameter is omitted, the command refers to the two-port selected using SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection: TCOefficient:CALibration. Example: SOURce:POWer:CORRection:TCOefficient[:STATe] on page 983 Manual operation: "Frequency / Transm. Coefficients: Insert, Delete, Delete All"...
  • Page 983 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameters: <Frequency> Stimulus frequency value. If several points with identical fre- quencies are added, the analyzer automatically ensures a fre- quency spacing of 1 Hz. Range: Stimulus values outside the frequency range of the analyzer are allowed.
  • Page 984 TCO? DUT Clear the entire list. Query whether the transmission coefficients are still taken into account. The response is 0. MMEM:LOAD:CORR:TCO 'C:\Users\Public\Documents \Rohde-Schwarz\ZNL\Traces\Test.s2p', 'S21', DUT Load a power loss list from a previously created 2-port Touch- stone file. Manual operation: "Two Port Config..."...
  • Page 985 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference ..............985 SOURce<Ch>:POWer:CORRection[:ACQuire] ...... 986 SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection[:ACQuire]:VERification:RESult? ................ 987 SOURce<Ch>:POWer:CORRection:DATA ..........988 SOURce<Ch>:POWer:CORRection:DATA:PARameter<Wv>? .....989 SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:DATA:PARameter<Wv>:COUNt? ................989 SOURce:POWer:CORRection:NREadings ............. 989 SOURce<Ch>:POWer:CORRection:OSOurces[:STATe] ................ 990 SOURce:POWer:CORRection:PMETer:ID ................990 SOURce:POWer:CORRection:PPOWer ................991 SOURce:POWer:CORRection:PSELect ............991 SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:STATe SOURce<Ch>:POWer:CORRection[:ACQuire] <SourceType>[, <SourcePort>[, <CalOnlyPortFreq>]]...
  • Page 986 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: SOUR:POW:CORR:OSO:STAT OFF To improve the accuracy, switch off all other sources during the calibration sweep. SOUR:POW:CORR:NRE 2; COLL:AVER:NTOL 0.5 Increase the number of readings and reduce the power toler- ance to improve the accuracy.
  • Page 987 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: *RST; :SOURce:POWer:CORRection:NREadings 2 SOURce:POWer:CORRection:COLLect:AVERage: NTOLerance 0.5 Increase the number of readings and reduce the power toler- ance to improve the accuracy. SOURce:POWer:CORRection:ACQuire PORT,1 Perform a source power calibration using port 1 as a source port.
  • Page 988 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Example: *RST; :SWE:POIN 10 Reset the instrument and reduce the number of sweep points to SOUR:POW:CORR:ACQ PORT,1 Perform a source power calibration using port 1 as a source port. SOUR:POW:CORR:DATA? 'A1' Query the correction values. The analyzer returns 10 comma- separated real numbers.
  • Page 989 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference LTSTamp Timestamp in local time FSMode Returns the frequency sweep mode that was used during cali- bration. STEP: Stepped mode (for all segments) ANAL: Swept mode (for at least one segment) Because swept mode is limited to frequency sweeps this always returns STEP.
  • Page 990 Defines the source power the R&S ZNL/ZNLE uses to perform the first calibration sweep of the source power calibration ("Reference Receiver Cal Power"). This prede- fined power value is ignored if the R&S ZNL/ZNLE is set to use the calculated port power result (SOURce:POWer:CORRection:PSELect CPOW).
  • Page 991 Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference SOURce:POWer:CORRection:PSELect <CalPower> Defines how to define the source power the R&S ZNL/ZNLE uses to perform the first calibration sweep of the source power calibration ("Reference Receiver Cal Power"). Parameters: <CalPower> CPOWer | PPOWer...
  • Page 992 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference ................995 SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:STOP ................996 SOURce:POWer:SWEepend:MODE ................996 SOURce:POWer:SWEepend:SDELay SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:LEVel:OFFSet <Offset> Specifies a gain (positive values) or an attenuation (negative values) in the signal path between the source port and the calibrated reference plane. The value has no impact on the source power.
  • Page 993 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameters: <IntSourcePow> Internal source power Range: The usable power range is frequency-dependent; refer to the data sheet. *RST: -10 dBm Default unit: dBm Example: FUNC "XFR:POW:RAT B1, A2" Activate a frequency sweep and select the ratio B1/A2 as mea- sured parameter for channel and trace no.
  • Page 994 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:SLOPe <Slope> Defines a linear factor to modify the internal source power at port <PhyPt> as a func- tion of the stimulus frequency. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <PhyPt> Test port number of the analyzer Parameters: <Slope>...
  • Page 995 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameters: <ReduceAt OFF (default): at sweep end the output power of the sweep start SweepEnd> is restored ON: at sweep end the output power of the driving port is reduced as if the channel base power was set to its minimum possible...
  • Page 996 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameters: <Value> Start or stop power of the sweep. Range: -150 dBm to +100 dBm. The usable power range is frequency-dependent; refer to the data sheet. Increment: 0.01 dB *RST: -25 dBm start power, 0 dBm stop power...
  • Page 997 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Parameters: <SettlingDelay> Settling delay Default unit: s Manual operation: "Settling Delay / Reset Delay" on page 145 SOURce... (other) SOURce<Ch>:LPORt<LogPt> <PhysicalPort>[, <PhysicalPort>] Assigns the logical port number <LogPt> either to the single-ended physical port <PhysicalPort1>...
  • Page 998 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference SOURce<Ch>:LPORt<LogPt>:CLEar [<Scope>] Dissolves balanced port <LogPt> or all logical ports. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <LogPt> Logical port number used to number balanced ports. Range according to the current port configuration (SOURce<Ch>:LPORt<LogPt>). If an undefined balanced port number is used, the analyzer generates an error message.
  • Page 999 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference STATus:PRESet Configures the status reporting system such that device-dependent events are repor- ted at a higher level. The command affects only the transition filter registers, the ENABle registers, and queue enabling: ●...
  • Page 1000 ® Command reference R&S ZNL/ZNLE VNA command reference Suffix: <Lev> Selects one of the two QUEStionable:LIMit registers; see "STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<1|2>" on page 636. Parameters: <BitPattern> Range: 0 to 65535 (decimal representation) *RST: Example: STAT:QUES:LIM2:ENAB 6 Set bits no. 1 and 2 of the QUEStionable:LIMit2:ENABle...

This manual is also suitable for:

Znle

Table of Contents